Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Catalogues Light.
The current TRILUX product
portfolio includes interior
luminaires, exterior luminaires
and installation systems for
the hospital sector.
Interior lighting
The TRILUX catalogue
Lighting Design Light and
interiors at hand contains
the complete range of inno-
vative and tried-and-tested
luminaires for interior
lighting.
Exterior lighting
In order to consider and
document the complex tech-
nical and mechanical param-
eters of various exterior
lighting systems, individual
brochures give detailed infor-
mation on these luminaire
series.
Medical technology
Light and installation systems
for light and normal care,
for intensive care areas and
clean rooms are featured
in several catalogues and
brochures.
Lighting planning
The TRILUX lighting design
software TX-WIN is an easy-
to-operate tool which ena-
bles the correct and rapid
planning on site of interior
lighting installations, street
lighting and the lighting of
squares.
Positive light influences
Good lighting is the prereq-
uisite for harmonious and
motivating surroundings,
improving peoples well-
being and promoting the
individual, to greater things.
1
Contents
Wall-mounted luminaires
Programme review 130
DIALOG WALL-I 132
DIALOG WALL-II 134
ES 50 136
4022 138
Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires
Programme review 140
CENERA, 3604 142
362 144
2
Surface-mounted diffuser luminaires
Programme review 260
333 262
330, 331, 332 266
1330 F 270
740 276
654, 664, 665, 717 278
CENTA-S 302
3
The World-Wide Web
The TRILUX virtual portal is world-wide. Downloading Light can also be experien-
located at www.trilux.de or new software and current ced in our virtual light studio,
www.trilux.co.uk where the data for photometric calcula- allowing the visitor to inter-
latest information on TRILUX tions is just one of the many actively explore light effects,
and its products can be possibilities this website has light control, light situations
obtained around the clock, to offer. and light spaces.
www.trilux.de
5
TRILUX headquarters New developments are sim- TRILUX Area 2
Arnsberg/Germany ulated, prototypes are test- Arnsberg/Germany
At the headquarters, admin- ed and the high quality of Area 2 houses the develop-
istration, client information the production is routinely ment and production of med-
centre, luminaire production check-tested in photometri- ical supply units for normal or
and a fully automatic high- cal, electromechanical and intensive care. In addition to
bay warehouse are brought acoustic laboratories. the actual product portfolio
together on a 100 000 m2 this TRILUX branch also offers
site. The light information centre extensive planning services
with integrated showrooms ranging from design engi-
Here, our development engi- allowing to experience various neering up to CAD realisation
neers research lighting solu- lighting effects is an ideal drawings.
tions of tomorrow by using platform for the intensive
progressive means. exchange of views.
The World
of TRILUX
6
CETEK S.A.S. ZALUX S.A. TEL TRILUX ELECTRONICS
Clermont-Ferrand/France Zaragoza/Spain & LUMINAIRES INC.
The production site CETEK The production range of Manila/Philippines
S.A.S. in Clermont-Ferrand ZALUX S.A. in Zaragoza/ With TEL TRILUX ELEC-
in France stands for the Spain the TRILUX group TRONICS & LUMINAIRES
Pan-European commitment plant which is specially TRILUX is also present in the
of the TRILUX group. Line adjusted to the production East-Asian market. At this
optimisation for key product of plastic is mainly char- site, production is mainly
ranges offers us the chance acterised by weather-proof concentrated on luminaires
to improve efficiency with luminaires and the corre- for the Far-East and elec-
segment-oriented produc- sponding components. tronic lighting components.
tion.
7
I cant understand why people are frightened by
new ideas. Im frightened of old ones.
John Cage
The targetted deployment of Prestigious lighting planning CALIS represents the TRILUX
light activates, motivates, featuring architecture-com- concept developed to visu-
offers visual comfort and patible light effects requires alise these requirements.
puts the built environment planning competence. Realised by highly-specialised
into the right light. CALIS (Computer Aided designers, the program deliv-
Light Simulation) is a state- ers, as stills or animations,
When planning an environ- of-the-art planning tool the first, 3D-based impres-
ment, the conception of arti- paving the way from a cre- sions about the interplay of
ficial lighting compatible ative light idea to a suitable architecture and light, even
with the architectural objec- technical lighting solution. during the design stages.
tives is of crucial impor-
tance.
Photometric laboratory
TRILUX optics are developed for the pro-
duction stage in interactive processes by
means of computer simulations and meas-
urements on the goniophotometer or on
the rotating mirror goniophotometer. Tests
on the precision photometer bench supply
decisive elements for the material selection.
Close co-operation with all major lamp
manufacturers, and a multi-source philosophy
underline the objectivity of our research.
10
Product developments
for better light
The solution of lighting tasks An application-conform An exemplary solution is The elliptical form in classical
is the result of many exactly product with maximum effect CLASSICA the TRILUX retro design gives CLASSICA
harmonised individual steps. is the major goal that should system for well-aimed and an unmistakable originality.
always be reached. accentuated lighting.
Based on a differentiated
requirement profile, photom- CLASSICA offers a wide
etric, electromechanical, range of technical charac-
ergonomical and architectural teristics which turn the
aspects have to be consid- product into a problem solver
ered during development and for accentuated lighting.
construction.
11
A star-spangled sky for
the European Parliament
in Strasbourg/France
12
Atatrk International Airport
in Istanbul/Turkey:
Dynamic lighting for an
architectural star-performance
13
For reflection ...
Louvre production
The basic material for TRILUX
louvres is processed in
modern production sites by
means of procedures which
are tested in conformance
with ISO 9001. All aluminium
reflectors for downlights and
suspended circular luminaires
are surface-coated (post-
anodised).
Parabolic louvres
RPV, RPR, RSX, RPX
Louvres with parabolic longi-
tudinal and transverse reflec-
tors shine out thanks to
practice-oriented light distri-
bution, high rentability as
well as luminance limitation
required for areas with normal
DSE usage. The monitors
can be arranged towards the
luminaires at will when using
RPR, RSX and RPX louvres
which are characterised by
their all-round luminance limi-
tation.
14
... and transmission
Diffuser production
Decades of experience in
the processing of plastics
and regular laboratory tests
for quality assurance in the
current production guarantee
the long service life of
TRILUX luminaire diffusers.
PMMA and PC
TRILUX diffusers made of PC
or PMMA are mechanically
stable and torsionally rigid.
However, in the unlikely case
of damages, replacement
diffusers are available at
least 10 years after a lumi-
naire model is discontinued.
With additional
specular reflectors
Increased working efficien-
cies and improved glare
limitation are realised by
computer-optimised specular
reflectors within the diffuser
luminaires. The reflectors of
the high-quality series 333
are made of reflection-inten-
sified aluminium with a par-
ticularly high total reflection.
15
Circular Luminaires in circular shape
offer a wide planning scope
luminaires thanks to their non-directional
form. The TRILUX range of
circular luminaires includes
downlights, double-reflection
systems and suspended
luminaires with PEXIGLAS or
aluminium reflectors.
290, 293
290 or 293 series down-
lights for recess openings
offer an excellent all-round
package. The basic versions
can be equipped with a wide
range of modular design
accessories. All items are
retro-fit, meaning that later
adaptations are possible with
no additional hassle!
Page 20
16
1280, 1281 129, 367 PSH, PSG ROT, ROS ROD, ROB
128 downlights convince The 367 series represents PSH or PSG circular lumi- These high-performance Rooms with different ceiling
with their rapid installation a non-directional recessed naires with double-reflec- suspended luminaires are heights can be illuminated by
by means of the tool-free luminaire system with radial tion system are striking predestined for use in repre- these rotationally symmet-
spring mechanism. Different specular louvres. A radial light ornaments for surface, sentative areas. The optical rical suspended luminaires.
reflector versions with colour- louvre with the same con- recess and suspended systems consist of trans- The reflectors are facetted
adapted or contrast-forming struction principle also char- mounting. All luminaires of parent refraction reflectors in the lower section. Concen-
bezel rings offer a wide acterises the design of the this series share the same with a well-balanced indirect tric profiled prisms of the
planning scope. smaller 129 versions. convincing optical principle. component or of purely ROB version wash the ceiling
direct parabolic reflectors. area in a favourable light.
17
18
290, The 29 series represents
downlights in two sizes
293 for recess openings of
224 mm or 138 mm.
19
Downlights with smooth reflector
or specular facetted reflector
Application
Sales areas, reception halls,
corridors, conference
rooms, hotels, restaurants
and residential areas.
Optical system
Highly-specular reflector, for
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. Reflector made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. Safe retention by
means of screwed plug pro-
viding earth continuity. With
smooth reflector.
B With facetted specular
reflector.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, galvanised, with
bezel ring made of die-cast Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
zinc. Shadow gap between W opening mm W opening mm
bezel ring and reflector rim.
2901 W/TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 1.7 2901 C/TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 1.7
Ceiling recess mounting by
2901 W/TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7 2901 C/TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7
means of rapid-mounting
springs. 2901 W/TCT26 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.1 2901 C/TCT26 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.1
C Chrome bezel ring. 2902 W/TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 2.2 2902 C/TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 2.2
W White bezel ring. 2902 W/TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.2 2902 C/TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.2
2902 W/TCT26 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.9 2902 C/TCT26 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.9
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
and strain relief systems for
mains supply and further wir-
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts.
20
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
W opening mm W opening mm
2901 W-B/TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 1.7 2901 C-B/TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 1.7
2901 W-B/TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7 2901 C-B/TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7
2901 W-B/TCT26
2902 W-B/TCD13
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3
2xTC-D13/G24d-1
224
224
2.1
2.2
2901 C-B/TCT26
2902 C-B/TCD13
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3
2xTC-D13/G24d-1
224
224
2.1
2.2
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
2902 W-B/TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.2 2902 C-B/TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.2 Degree of protection in closed
2902 W-B/TCT26 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.9 2902 C-B/TCT26 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.9 ceiling systems underside IP 23
Degree of protection combined with
CA, WA, FS, FT underside IP 44
21
Downlights with smooth reflector
or specular facetted reflector,
suitable for DSE applications
Application
Sales areas, reception halls,
corridors, conference
rooms, hotels, restaurants
and residential areas. Suita-
ble for areas with normal
DSE usage.
Optical system
Highly-specular reflector, for
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. Reflector made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. Luminance limit-
ed to L 200 cd/m2 at ref-
erence angle 65, thus
corresponding fully to LG 3,
Cat. II. Safe retention by
means of screwed plug pro-
viding earth continuity. With
smooth reflector.
B With facetted specular
reflector.
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
W opening mm W opening mm
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, galvanised, with 2901 W/TCD18 CAT2 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7 2901 C/TCD18 CAT2 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7
bezel ring made of die-cast 2901 W/TCD26 CAT2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.1 2901 C/TCD26 CAT2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.1
zinc. Shadow gap between 2902 W/TCD18 CAT2 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.1 2902 C/TCD18 CAT2 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.1
bezel ring and reflector rim. 2902 W/TCD26 CAT2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.8 2902 C/TCD26 CAT2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.8
Ceiling recess mounting by
means of rapid-mounting
springs.
C Chrome bezel ring.
W White bezel ring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
and strain relief systems for
mains supply and further wir-
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table
lasts. No. 0307 No. 0307
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
Luminaires can also be sup- CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
plied with electronic control BZ1 BZ1
gear, reference suffix E, NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/0.8/BZ1
e.g. 2901 W/TCD26 CAT2 E.
22
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
W opening mm W opening mm
2901 W-B/TCD18 CAT2
2901 W-B/TCD26 CAT2
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
1xTC-D26/G24d-3
224
224
1.7
2.1
2901 C-B/TCD18 CAT2
2901 C-B/TCD26 CAT2
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
1xTC-D26/G24d-3
224
224
1.7
2.1
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
2902 W-B/TCD18 CAT2 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.1 2902 C-B/TCD18 CAT2 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.1 Degree of protection in closed
2902 W-B/TCD26 CAT2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.8 2902 C-B/TCD26 CAT2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.8 ceiling systems underside IP 23
Degree of protection combined with
CA, WA, underside IP 44
areas, a metal
halide version of
2901 series
downlights is
available.
Lamps with up
to 150 W and
14 000 lumens
can be utilised,
guaranteeing the
right light for
Mechanical glare limitation every situation.
The luminance limitation necessary for
DSE workplaces assures specific light
guiding thanks to highly-specular,
post-anodised reflector surfaces and
efficient lamp shielding.
23
Compact downlights with smooth reflector
or specular facetted reflector
Application
Reception halls, corridors,
conference rooms, can-
teens, lounges, hotels, res-
taurants and residential
areas.
Optical system
Highly-specular reflector, for
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. Reflector made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. Safe retention by
means of screwed plug pro-
viding earth continuity. With
smooth reflector.
B With facetted specular
reflector.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, galvanised, with
bezel ring made of polycar-
bonate. Shadow gap
between bezel ring and
reflector rim. Easy ceiling
recess mounting by means
of rapid-mounting springs. Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
C Chrome bezel ring. W opening mm W opening mm
W White bezel ring. 2931 W/TCD10 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 138 0.7 2931 C/TCD10 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 138 0.7
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
and strain relief systems for
mains supply and further wir-
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts.
24
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
W opening mm W opening mm
2931 W-B/TCD10 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 138 0.7 2931 C-B/TCD10 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 138 0.7 652d
Degree of protection IP 20
25
290
Decorative accessories
Decorative bezel rings Decorative glass attachment with Decor disk 02900 DS
1 piece, spherical, made of die-cast bezel ring 1 piece, consisting of circular float glass
zinc, to be fixed without tools, safe 1 piece, consisting of spherical bezel attachment, transparent, with frosted
retention by means of spring catches. ring and circular float glass attach- centred concentric detail, interior
ment, transparent, with frosted centred opening 100 mm, to be mounted into
02900 C chrome concentric detail, interior opening downlight without tools, safe retention
02900 W white 100 mm, fixed to the bezel ring by means of chromed spring catches.
without tools by means of chromed
retention rods. Safe retention by means
of spring catches.
02900 CS
with chrome decorative bezel ring
02900 WS
with white decorative bezel ring
26
C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2003
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2, BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3/1.5/BZ2
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h
Conical lenses For rapid mounting Cross-blade louvre 02900 X Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.8 h
1 piece, consisting of circular glass The cross-blade louvre support can for 290 downlights. h = Luminaire height above working plane
attachment with cone, to be mounted be retro-fitted by means of a simple 1 piece, consisting of parabolic lamella 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
into downlight without tools, safe screw. The louvre itself is easily unit made of highly-specular reflection- for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
retention by means of chromed spring snapped onto the support without intensified aluminium and support. direct indirect
catches. using tools. Can also be used in combination with 2901/TCD13 + 02900 X 1.18 0.59
DLOR
0.59
ULOR
0.00
further decorative accessories. 2901/TCD18 + 02900 X 1.00 0.52 0.52 0.00
02900 KS frosted cone, 2901/TCT26 + 02900 X 0.59 0.59 0.59 0.00
2902/TCD13 + 02900 X 0.69 0.53 0.53 0.00
transparent glass attachment. 2902/TCD18 + 02900 X 0.63 0.43 0.43 0.00
02900 KT transparent cone, 2902/TCT26 + 02900 X 0.33 0.53 0.53 0.00
27
290
Accessories for higher degrees of protection
02901 CA with chrome decorative 02901 C-FT with chrome decorative 02901 C-FS with chrome decorative
bezel ring. bezel ring. bezel ring.
02901 WA with white decorative 02901 W-FT with white decorative 02901 W-FS with white decorative
bezel ring. bezel ring. bezel ring.
28
Cover accessories
also prevent mechanically
damaged lamps from falling
down highly recommended
e.g. in the food industry, gro-
cery shops or restaurants.
2911 series
29 downlights in IP 54 all-round are recommended for
ceilings which are not fully closed, e.g. strip ceilings.
The fully closed luminaire body made of die-cast aluminium
offers protection against the ingression of dust and humidity
in the ceiling void. Transparent glass covers or Fresnel lenses,
described opposite, close the downlight from the underside.
29
293
Decorative accessories
30
290, 293
Mounting accessories
Mounting accessories
290 or 293 series down-
lights can be installed in
almost all suspended ceiling
systems due to their low
heights of only 120 mm or
90 mm.
02930/100 02900/150
286 172
22
100
90 138
59
23
200 (0293)
450 (0290)
228
188
595 (/600) 60
620 (/625) 324
344
31
32
1280, 128 series TRILUX down-
lights stand for efficiency
1281 and technical know-how.
A careful selection of quality
materials ensures long serv-
ice life and high technical
performance. Options for
facetted reflectors are avail-
able for the 128 series.
1280 1281
Downlights for ceiling re- Downlights for ceiling re-
cess opening 185 mm. cess opening 240 mm.
Predestined for low to For application areas with
medium illuminances up to increased light requirements.
300 lx. With white or highly- With white or highly-specular
specular reflectors made of reflectors made of UV-stabi-
UV-stabilised polycarbonate lised polycarbonate and
and perfectly integrated perfectly integrated colour-
colour-adapted or contrast- adapted or contrast-forming
forming bezel rings. bezel rings.
Page 34 Page 36
33
Downlights with white or highly-specular reflector,
recess opening 185 mm
Application
Reception halls, corridors,
conference rooms, can-
teens, lounges, hotels, res-
taurants and residential
areas.
Optical system
Reflector made of UV-stabi-
lised polycarbonate.
W white, for a uniform
light distribution. With per-
fectly integrated white bezel
ring.
HW aluminised, highly-
specular, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution. With
perfectly integrated white
bezel ring.
H aluminised, highly-
specular, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution. With
perfectly integrated highly-
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
specular bezel ring.
W opening mm
Options for facetted reflec- 1280 W/1TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 185 0.9
tors are available for the 1280 W/1TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 185 0.9
128 series. Please add 1280 W/2TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 185 1.3
the reference -F to the 1280 W/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 185 1.3
main code,
e.g. 1280 H-F/2TCD18.
130
100
Luminaire body
1-25
7
185-190
ing recess mounting, thanks 315
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
and strain relief systems for
mains supply and further wir-
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2, Golden attraction No. 0300
including earth connection Prestigious applications call for corresponding luminaires. DIN 5040: A40
terminal. With low-loss bal- The 128 series downlights are optionally available with CIBSE BZ:
lasts. gold-coloured reflectors and matched bezel rings, com- BZ4
bining appealing design and excellent photometrics. NBN L 14-002:
BZ4
Luminaires can also be sup-
plied with electronic control
gear, reference suffix E,
e.g. 1280 W/1TCD13 E. Lighting installation with 96 downlights
1280/2 TCD 18 ...with VVG ...with EVG
Low-loss ballast Electronic control gear
34
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
W opening mm W opening mm
1280 HW/1TCD13
1280 HW/1TCD18
1xTC-D13/G24d-1
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
185
185
0.9
0.9
1280 H/1TCD13
1280 H/1TCD18
1xTC-D13/G24d-1
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
185
185
0.9
0.9
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
1280 HW/2TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 185 1.3 1280 H/2TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 185 1.3 Degree of protection in closed
1280 HW/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 185 1.3 1280 H/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 185 1.3 ceiling systems underside IP 23
Degree of protection combined with
01280 O, 01280 P underside IP 44
1-25
1-25
1 Number of luminaires
7
7
in m2
20
80 13 14 26 28
100 16 17 32 34
150 24 25 48 50
200 31 32 61 63
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 0300 No. 0300 Suspension length lp 0.00 m
Prismatic covers
Plastic, with concentric detail. To be
mounted into the downlight without
tools, safe retention with bayonet
system. IP 44 from underside.
01280 O opal, 1 piece
01280 P transparent, 1 piece
35
Downlights with white or highly-specular reflector,
recess opening 240 mm
Application
Reception halls, corridors,
conference rooms, can-
teens, lounges, hotels, res-
taurants and residential
areas.
Optical system
Reflector made of UV-stabi-
lised polycarbonate.
W white, for a uniform
light distribution. With per-
fectly integrated white bezel
ring.
HW aluminised, highly-
specular, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution. With
perfectly integrated white
bezel ring.
H aluminised, highly-
specular, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution. With
perfectly integrated highly-
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
specular bezel ring.
W opening mm
Options for facetted reflec- 1281 W/1TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 240 1.2
tors are available for the 1281 W/1TCD26 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 240 1.6
128 series. Please add 1281 W/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 240 1.6
the reference -F to the 1281 W/2TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 240 2.4
main code,
e.g. 1280 H-F/2TCD18.
140
125
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, galvanised. Ceil-
1-25
10
ing recess mounting, thanks 240
to integrated spring brack- 394
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready 28
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
and strain relief systems for
mains supply and further wir-
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2, Golden attraction No. 0302
including earth connection Prestigious applications call for corresponding luminaires. DIN 5040: A40
terminal. With low-loss bal- The 128 series downlights are optionally available with CIBSE BZ:
lasts. gold-coloured reflectors and matched bezel rings, com- BZ4
bining appealing design and excellent photometrics. NBN L 14-002:
BZ4
Luminaires can also be sup-
plied with electronic control
gear, reference suffix E,
e.g. 1281 W/1TCD18 E.
36
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
W opening mm W opening mm
1281 HW/1TCD18
1281 HW/1TCD26
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
1xTC-D26/G24d-3
240
240
1.2
1.6
1281 H/1TCD18
1281 H/1TCD26
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
1xTC-D26/G24d-3
240
240
1.2
1.6
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
1281 HW/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 240 1.6 1281 H/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 240 1.6 Degree of protection in closed
1281 HW/2TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 240 2.4 1281 H/2TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 240 2.4 ceiling systems underside IP 23
Degree of protection combined with
01281 O, 01281 P underside IP 44
1 Number of luminaires
1-25
1-25
En 100 lx 200 lx
10
10
150 16 17 32 33
200 21 22 41 42
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 0302 No. 0302 Suspension length lp 0.00 m
Prismatic covers
Mechanical lamp protection and an
increased underside degree of protec-
tion IP 44 are realised thanks to option-
ally available covers, made of non-yel-
lowing plastic, to be fixed without using
tools.
37
38
129, 129 and 367 series
recessed luminaires with
367 radial specular louvres are
suitable for versatile use due
to their characteristic look
and their brilliant surface in
combination with higher light
output and limited ceiling
space required. All louvres
consist of concentric ring
reflectors and V-wedges
radially arranged between
the two reflectors. 129 367
129 series circular reces- 367 luminaires are con-
sed luminaires with radial ceived for architecturally
specular louvre are an ar- interesting installations with
chitectural alternative to illuminances of 300 lx up to
conventional downlights. 500 lx. They can be equipped
Predestined for low up to with two or three lumen-rich
medium illuminances because compact fluorescent lamps
of the consequent twin-lamp TCD 26 W.
equipment with compact
fluorescent lamps.
Page 40 Page 41
39
Circular recessed luminaires
with radial specular louvre
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms, reception halls, corri-
dors and financial institu-
tions.
Optical system
Highly-specular radial louvre
made of aluminium, for nar-
row/wide-angle light distribu-
tion, aluminised. Radial lou-
vre consisting of interior and
exterior ring reflector with
V-wedges radially arranged
between the two reflectors.
Safe louvre retention by
means of spring catches, to
be used without tools. With
highly-specular overhead
reflector made of aluminium,
upper section of 129
series reflector with addition-
al structural effect.
Luminaire body
Consisting of ceiling ring Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
made of solvent-free pow- W opening mm W opening mm
der-coated sheet steel, 1295/2TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 200 1.2 1296/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 236 1.2
white, and gear tray made of 1295/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 200 1.2 1296/2TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 236 1.2
sheet steel, joined together
by three fixing brackets.
Ceiling mounting by means 155 155
151
151
of integrated brake latch
system.
10-30
10-30
5
200 236
Electrical connection 362 425
= 30
40
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
W opening mm
3672N C-RPH/TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 304 3.6
3673N C-RPH/TCD26 3xTC-D26/G24d-3 304 4.4 652d
Degree of protection IP 20
160
Data table no. 2007
152
1 Number of luminaires
En 100 lx 200 lx
10-30
Mounting plate
1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, fully galvanised. Recommended
for mounting of 367 luminaires in ceilings made of wood,
gypsum plaster or similar with low load-bearing capability or
little impression resistance.
02062/600 for ceiling plates in module 600 mm.
02062/625 for ceiling plates in module 625 mm.
41
42
PSH, PSG Circular luminaires PSH and
PSG place distinctive archi-
tectural accents. Functional
elements of the luminaire
system are turned into deco-
rative design components.
43
Surface-mounted and recessed luminaires
with double-reflection PSH system
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms, foyers, stairwells and
financial institutions. Suitable
for areas with normal DSE
usage.
Primary optics
Consisting of circular reflec-
tor, lamp support and deco-
rative glass ring. Highly-
specular reflector made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. Decorative ring
made of transparent float
glass which envelops the
reflector. To be fixed to the
secondary reflector by
means of four chromed
profile rods.
Secondary facetted
reflector
Highly-specular, made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. The edge of the
secondary facetted reflector
covers the grid in case of
recess mounting of the lumi-
naire body.
Luminaire body
Circular, made of solvent-
free powder-coated sheet
steel, white. Secondary
facetted reflector and prima-
ry optics are fixed to the
luminaire body by means of
spring catches and wire
brackets to be used without
tools. Tool-free electrical
connection by means of
plug-in coupling.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 4-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts.
Indications Page
Lamp characteristics 444
44
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
W Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 2.0 h
5383 PSH/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24/2G10 7.7 h = Luminaire height above working plane
5383 PSH/TCD26 3xTC-D26/G24d-3 9.5
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
593 direct indirect
570 DLOR ULOR
5383PSH/2xTCF24 1.00 0.70 0.62 0.08
5383PSH/TCD26 0.82 0.57 0.51 0.06
300
272
260
E
160
400
45
Surface-mounted and suspended luminaires
with double-reflection PSG or PSH system
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms, foyers, stairwells and
financial institutions.
PSH also suitable for
areas with normal DSE
usage.
Primary optics
Consisting of circular reflec-
tor, lamp support and deco-
rative glass ring. Highly-
specular reflector made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. Decorative ring
made of transparent float
glass which envelops the
reflector. To be fixed to the
luminaire body by means of
four chromed profile rods.
Secondary optics
PSG with decorative
element made of satin-finish
float glass.
PSH with concave, high-
ly-specular facetted second-
ary reflector ring, made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. Variable mount-
ing between the primary
optics and ceiling reflector.
Ceiling reflector
To cover the luminaire body,
highly-specular, made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium.
Luminaire body
Circular, made of solvent-
free powder-coated sheet
steel, white. The primary and
secondary optics are fixed
to the luminaire body by
means of flat head bolt and
wire brackets. Tool-free Reference Lamps/socket kg
electrical connection by W
means of plug-in connection. 5393N PSG/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24/2G10 7.9
5393N PSG/TCD26 3xTC-D26/G24d-3 8.6
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 4-pole Wire suspension
plug-in connection terminal 05390 SN
for wires up to 2.5 mm2, For luminaires
including earth connection 5393N PSG, 5393 PSH.
terminal. With low-loss bal- Height continually adjustable,
lasts. consisting of:
2 steel wires, galvanised,
Luminaires can also be sup- 1 mm, 4150 mm long,
plied with electronic control for suspension lengths of
gear, reference suffix E, up to 2 m,
e.g. 5393N PSG/TCD26 E. 1 circular ceiling fixing plate
220 mm including ceil-
Further lamp options upon ing trim cap, sheet steel,
request. steel-grey,
4 luminaire fixing clamps,
1 connection terminal
TC-D C 0 - C 180 Data table
TC-F No. 2009 5 x 2.5 mm2,
DIN 5040: C42 2 strain relief systems,
CIBSE BZ: 1 connection wire set
BZ3/1.5/BZ4 4 x 0.75 mm2, 2300 mm
NBN L 14-002: long.
BZ4
Indications Page
Lamp characteristics 444
46
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
W Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.4 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.4 h
5393 PSH/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24/2G10 6.8 h = Luminaire height above working plane
5393 PSH/TCD26 3xTC-D26/G24d-3 7.6
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
Wire suspension DLOR ULOR
5393N PSG/2xTCF24 1.13 0.64 0.43 0.21
05390 SC 5393N PSG/TCD26 0.87 0.51 0.34 0.17
For fixing 5393 luminaires 5393PSH/2xTCF24 1.00 0.72 0.48 0.24
5393PSH/TCD26 0.79 0.58 0.39 0.19
to inclined ceilings. Height
continually adjustable up to Technical information see page 440.
Cover 05390 K
(not illustrated) 1 piece,
sheet steel, steel-grey. For
the ceiling-oriented covering
of the suspended luminaire
body 5393 PSH.
47
ROT, ROS
ROD, ROB
48
Public halls or represent-
ative interiors are just a
few examples of room
architectures which can
be put into the right light
by means of appealing
rotationally symmetrical
suspended luminaires.
Direct or direct/indirect
reflectors as well as opti-
cal systems with deco-
rative indirect light compo-
nent are winning light- ROT ROS ROD ROB
guiding components. ROT features attractive The direct light distribution Suspended luminaires ROD As compared to the ROD
suspended luminaires with of the ROS luminaires cre- with direct double parabolic versions, ROB luminaires
refraction reflectors offering ates a pleasant atmosphere reflector offer additional have profiled prisms in the
a direct light component of thanks to glare-free light. planning scope with three upper section of the reflector
85 % compared to 15 % indi- The similarity with the ROT different construction sizes which provide additional
rect light. The striking design series is clearly accentuated and lumen packages ranging decorative indirect light. The
with chromed construction by the corresponding design from 1200 lm up to 19000 lm. working plane is illuminated
components fits perfectly in of the luminaire body and All reflectors can also be by the partially facetted
technical architectures. suspensions. equipped with decor disks. aluminium reflector just like
with ROD.
49
High-performance suspended luminaires
with refraction reflector ROT
Application
Public rooms and halls,
financial institutions, station
and airport foyers, trade fair
and exhibition halls and rep-
resentative entrance areas.
Production halls with a low
degree of pollution.
Optical system
Parabolic transparent refrac-
tion reflector made of acrylic
glass, with photometrically
effective prismatic system
for well-balanced ceiling illu-
mination by means of 15 %
indirect light component.
Luminaire body
Consisting of circular base
housing and anti-glare ring,
joined by functional chromed
steel rods, shaped around
the reflector form. Base
housing made of aluminium,
finished in graphite-grey
structuralised paint, to
house the electrical compo-
nents. Anti-glare ring made
of specular anodised alumini-
um, adding a decorative
touch to the refraction
reflector. With continually
adjustable wire suspension,
for suspension length of up
to 3.40 m.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with freely
suspended connection
cable.
TCT with electronic
control gear.
HIE with inductive
ballast.
With 3-pole plug-in connec-
tion terminal for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal, located
on the ceiling fixing plate of
the wire suspensions.
50
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
W Reference Lamps/socket kg Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.8 h
5361 ROT/TCT42 E 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 4.4 W h = Luminaire height above working plane
5361 ROT/HIE100 1xHIE100/E27* 6.7 5363 ROT/1xHIE250 1xHIE250/E40* 8.5
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires. * Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires. for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5361ROT/TCT42 E 2.41 0.94 0.77 0.17
5361ROT/HIE100 1.00 0.93 0.77 0.16
5363ROT/1xHIE250 0.42 0.91 0.71 0.20
Technical information see page 440.
51
High-performance suspended luminaires
with specular reflector ROS
Application
Public rooms and halls,
financial institutions, station
and airport foyers, trade fair
and exhibition halls and rep-
resentative entrance areas.
Production halls with a low
degree of pollution.
Optical system
Parabolic reflector made of
post-anodised aluminium.
Highly-specular outer sur-
face, semi-specular inner
surface. The cut-off angle is
at least 30.
Luminaire body
Consisting of circular base
housing made of aluminium,
finished in graphite-grey
structuralised paint, to
house the electrical compo-
nents. With four chromed
steel rods, for the connec-
tion to the steel wires. With
continually adjustable wire
suspension, for suspension
length of up to 3.40 m.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with freely
suspended connection
cable.
TCT with electronic
control gear.
HIE with inductive
ballast.
With 3-pole plug-in connec-
tion terminal for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal, located
on the ceiling fixing plate of
the wire suspensions.
52
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
W Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
5361 ROS/TCT42 E 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 4.4 h = Luminaire height above working plane
5361 ROS/HIE100 1xHIE100/E27* 6.7
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires. for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5361ROS/TCT42 E 2.57 0.77 0.77 0.00
+ 05361ROS-DS 2.78 0.72 0.72 0.00
5361ROS/HIE100 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
+ 05361ROS-DS 1.06 0.77 0.77 0.00
53
Suspended luminaires direct
with double parabolic reflector ROD
Application
Public rooms and halls,
financial institutions, station
and airport foyers, trade fair
and exhibition halls and rep-
resentative entrance areas.
Production halls with a low
degree of pollution.
Optical system
Double parabolic aluminium
reflector for rotationally sym-
metrical direct light distribu-
tion. Reflector made of
post-anodised aluminium
with a surface purity of
99.98 %, highly-specular
inner surface, semi-specular
outer surface, facetting in
lower reflector section. The
cut-off angle is at least 30.
Luminaire body
Consisting of circular base
housing, extruded aluminium
profile, silver-coated, to
house the electrical compo-
nents. With vertical cooling
ribs and adapted longitudinal
rods, for connection of the
wire suspension. Integrated
wire suspension with ceiling
fixing plate and cover plate
made of sheet steel, graph-
ite-grey. Continually adjusta-
ble wire suspension, for sus-
pension length of up to
3.40 m.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with freely
suspended connection
cable.
TCT with electronic
control gear.
HIE with inductive Reference Lamps/socket kg
ballast. W
With 3-pole plug-in connec- 5361 ROD/TCT18 E 1xTC-TEL18/GX24q-2 1.4
tion terminal for wires up to 5361 ROD/TCT26 E 1xTC-TEL26/GX24q-3 1.4
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal, located
on the ceiling fixing plate of
the wire suspension.
54
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
55
Suspended luminaires direct/indirect
with bifunctional reflector ROB
Application
Public rooms and halls,
financial institutions, station
and airport foyers, trade fair
and exhibition halls and rep-
resentative entrance areas.
Production halls with a low
degree of pollution.
Optical system
Bifunctional reflector,
direct/indirect, consisting of
upper part in PLEXIGLAS
with concentric channel
prisms for ceiling-oriented
indirect component and par-
abolic lower reflector part in
aluminium. Reflector made
of post-anodised aluminium
with a surface purity of
99.98 %, highly-specular
inner surface, semi-specular
outer surface, facetting in
lower reflector section,
increasing to the lower part.
The cut-off angle is at
least 30.
Luminaire body
Consisting of circular base
housing, extruded aluminium
profile, silver-coated, to
house the electrical compo-
nents. With vertical cooling
ribs and adapted longitudinal
rods, for connection of the
wire suspension. Integrated
wire suspension with ceiling
fixing plate and cover plate
made of sheet steel, graph-
ite-grey. Continually adjusta-
ble wire suspension, for sus-
pension length of up to
3.40 m.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready Reference Lamps/socket kg
for connection, with freely W
suspended connection 5361 ROB/TCT18 E 1xTC-TEL18/GX24q-2 1.6
cable. 5361 ROB/TCT26 E 1xTC-TEL26/GX24q-3 1.6
TCT with electronic
control gear.
HIE with inductive
ballast.
With 3-pole plug-in connec-
tion terminal for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal, located
on the ceiling fixing plate of
the wire suspension.
56
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
57
58
CLASSICA,
3-phase
voltage tracks
Spotlights for low-voltage Spotlights for mains- Spotlights for high-pres- 3-phase voltage tracks
halogen lamps voltage halogen lamps sure discharge lamps 3-phase voltage tracks for
Brilliant light is a characteris- The lamps for direct mains Lumen-rich metal halide surface, recess and sus-
tic feature of the CLASSICA connection are available lamps and high-pressure pended mounting allow to
spotlights for low-voltage in QT 60-150 W and sodium vapour lamps are realise versatile arrange-
halogen lamps in wattages QPAR 75 W. The QT-150 predestined for striking illu- ments of CLASSICA spot-
QT 35-90 W. Modern reflec- reflector has a 30 flood mination. The HIT version lights. Cross, L- and T-con-
tor technology for optimised characteristic, the PAR includes an integrated safety nectors as well as flexible
uniform circular surface versions are available for glass with UV protection. couplings extend the planning
lighting. 10 or 30. scope.
59
CLASSICA
Unmistakable retro design
CLASSICA is available in
silver-grey and white ver-
sions.
60
61
Voltage-track spotlights CLASSICA
for halogen lamps
*Use only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
62
3-phase adapter
The voltage-track adapters
for 3-phase voltage tracks
convince thanks to their in-
creased mechanical stability
and functional advantages
such as earthed conductor
connection and phase selec-
tion after installation.
0.8 1.8
0.8 1.8
0.8 1.8
0.8 1.8
0.8 1.2
0.8 1.2
0.8 1.2
0.8 1.2
63
Voltage-track spotlights CLASSICA
for high-pressure lamps
64
m kg white silver-grey white silver-grey white silver-grey
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.2
0.8 1.6
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.2
0.8 1.6
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.2
0.8 1.6
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.2
0.8 1.6
0.8 3.5
0.8 3.8
0.8 3.5
0.8 3.8
65
Planning indications
Data table no. 2159 Data table no. 2160 Data table no. 2161 Data table no. 2162 Data table no. 2163
1 Luminous intensity distribution 1 Luminous intensity distribution 1 Luminous intensity distribution 1 Luminous intensity distribution 1 Luminous intensity distribution
20 000 80 000 2 500 30 000 7 000
25 000 6 000
16 000 2 000 10
60 000 5 000
20 000
12 000 1 500 4 000
40 000 15 000
8 000 1 000 3 000
10 000 30
20 000 2 000
4 000 500 5 000 1 000
2 Cone diagram 12 2 Cone diagram 17 2 Cone diagram 35 2 Cone diagram 40 2 Cone diagram 10
/m 0.21 /m 0.30 /m 0.32 /m 0.37 /m 0.17
19 000 36 000 9 000 36 000 5 000
0.60 0.63 0.73 0.35
0.42 9 000 2 250 9 000
4 800 0.95 1.10 1 250
0.63 0.90 1 000 4 000 0.50
2 100 4 000 1.27 1.47 550
0.84 1.20 560 2 250 0.70
2 250 2 250 1.58 1.83 300
1.05 1.50 360 1 450 0.85
1 200 1 450 1.90 2.20 200
1.80 250 1 000 1.05
1.26 1 000
530 150
Illuminance
Illuminance
Illuminance
Illuminance
Illuminance
Em / lx
Em / lx
Em / lx
Em / lx
Em / lx
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m
Illuminance
ILCOS MT-70/30/1B-H-G12 LBS HST-C 100W PG12-1 ILCOS MT-70/30/1B-H-G12
4800 1.60
LBS HIT 35W G12 ILCOS STH-100-H/E-PD12 LBS HIT 35W G12
Em / lx
3300 0.48 3300 0.39
ILCOS MT-35/30/1B-H-G12 LBS HST-C 50W PG12-1 ILCOS MT-35/30/1B-H-G12
2300 0.92
ILCOS STH-50-H/E-PD12 Lamp type 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m
Lamp type Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V
with semi-specular bulb
Socket
GY 6.35
3 Lamp data
Socket Lamp type
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl. Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V with PAR reflector
E 27 flux / lm factor
Lamp designation Socket
Luminous Multipl. LBS QT-ax 12 90W GY6.35 12V E 27
flux / lm factor 1800 0.25
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-90-12-GY6.35
LBS QT32 150W/m E27 Lamp designation Beam
2400 1.00 angle
ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-150-320-E27
LBS QPAR30 75W/10 E27
10
ILCOS HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/10
LBS QPAR30 75W/30 E27
30
ILCOS HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/30
66
3-phase adapter 3-phase adapter with integrated Connection elements
CLASSICA spotlights are equipped ballast Cross, L- and T-connectors as well
with an electrical universal adapter for Spotlights for high-pressure lamps are as flexible couplings enable versatile
3-phase voltage tracks. Installation as equipped with a ballast housing within arrangements for voltage tracks, thus
well as phase selection and earthed the area of the voltage-track adapter. assuring maximum flexibility and varia-
conductor connection can be effected An additional locking device assures bility as to the architectural design and
without using tools. safe retention of the spotlights within installation of lighting installations with
the voltage track, also in case of spotlights.
increased loads.
E E E
400 V/16 A Mains supply
EU 27 WS EU 37 EU 30 WS EU 24 WS with 3-phase
N
L1
L2
A.C. 400 V/16 A
L3
230 V/16 A
Mains supply
N
LX with 1-phase
A.C. 230 V/16 A
EU 27 WS EU 37 EU 29 WS EU 35 WS
E E
Feeding and connection elements The planning example above shows Connection possibilities for 3-phase
(planning indications for earthed the guidance of the earthed conductor voltage tracks with the 3-phase
conductor) including the arrangement of the mains 400 V
In 3-phase voltage tracks, the earthed corresponding feeding and connection Max. load 3 x 3600 W = 10800 W.
conductor is guided on one side in the elements. Single fuse protection of all three
lower profile edge. During the planning, phases with 3 x 16 A. Cable cross-
the feeding and connection elements section 5 x 1.5 mm2 up to 5 x 2.5 mm2.
have to be selected in such a way that
the continuous guidance of the earthed Connection possibilities for 3-phase
conductor is assured. The location of voltage tracks with A.C. network
the earthed conductor is shown in the 230 V
product illustrations on the following Max. load 3600 W, optional distribution
accessories pages, defined for a to 3 circuits. Protection 1 x 16 A.
viewing direction looking down at the Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 up to
voltage-track system from above. 3 x 2.5 mm2.
67
3-phase voltage tracks and accessories
for surface and suspended mounting
WS white
SW black
AL silver-grey
EU 10 WS ...........1000 mm
EU 20 WS ...........2000 mm
EU 21 WS ...........3000 mm
EU 22 WS ...........4000 mm
black
36
EU 10 SW ...........1000 mm
EU 20 SW ...........2000 mm
EU 21 SW ...........3000 mm
EU 22 SW ...........4000 mm L-connector EU 27 L-connector EU 79
silver-grey Earthed conductor, interior* Earthed conductor, exterior*
EU 10 AL ............1000 mm Lateral or upper-plane Lateral or upper-plane
EU 20 AL ............2000 mm feeding possibilities. feeding possibilities.
EU 21 AL ............3000 mm
EU 22 AL ............4000 mm
Consisting of an extruded
aluminium profile, white, black
or silver-grey which serves
as earthed conductor at the
same time, and an inserted,
folded plastic profile with T-connector EU 30 T-connector EU 29
4 embedded copper con- Earthed conductor, left* Earthed conductor, right*
ductors, each with a cross- Lateral or upper-plane Lateral or upper-plane
section of 3 mm2 for three feeding possibilities. feeding possibilities.
separately switchable circuits.
Can be shortened on site.
68
Flexible coupling Wire suspension
EU 33 WS, EU 33 SW L 23
Upper-plane feeding Steel wire for sus-
possibility. pension lengths
of up to 1.40 m,
length to be regu-
lated, including
fixing clamp.
69
3-phase voltage tracks and accessories
for recess mounting
70
Longitudinal connector Feeding EUE 41 WS
EUE 26 WS Wall-to-wall feeding for
interior, for gap-free electrical recess and wall-to-wall
connection of two voltage mounting including end cap
tracks. EUE 42 WS.
71
T200
72 Katalog 2001
Spotlight modules Positionable modules Translucent modules Louvre luminaires Diffuser luminaires
Spotlight modules with car- The positionable louvre Due to a convincing The combination of 333 series diffuser lumi-
danic suspension for halo- modules prove themselves double-reflection louvre luminaires naires can also be integrated
gen, metal halide and high- as a superb feature of the technology, trans- and flexible tubular in the T200 system. This
pressure sodium vapour T200 tubular track system: lucent modules create a track arrangements offers a series with opal and trans-
lamps are striking compo- The manuvrability through comfortable and completely maximum planning scope. lucent PLEXIGLAS diffusers is
nents for accentuation light- a range of 50 offers uniform brightness. These The parabolic louvres in documented from page 262
ing. They meet the architec- ample scope of movement modules are thus specially either semi-specular or high- on, including the necessary
tural and functional demands for enabling excellent illumi- recommended for lighting of ly-specular finish are fully fixing accessories for inte-
for a successful integration nation in both confined and workstations equipped with compliant to CIBSE LG 3, gration in the tubular track
into the T200 system. expansive areas. TFT screen systems. cat. II. system T200.
Katalog 2001 73
T200
The essence of lighting
Light attracts
this motto acknowledges
the fact that good lighting
attracts prospective clients,
and charges the feel of the
facility.
In other words:
Accentuated light, focused
on sales objects, creates
the basic conditions for an
effective presentation of
goods. However, the neces-
sary basic lighting compo-
nent must meet modern
design criteria. This results
in diverging lighting tasks
which have been solved so
far with different lighting
systems.
An impressive example is
shown here: ultra-low-profile
translucent modules for a
uniform basic lighting are
combined with flexible spot-
lights in cardanic suspension.
74 Katalog 2001
Katalog 2001 75
T200
Dynamic design & architecture
Photometric components
provide the right light, e.g.
louvre luminaires for general
lighting or for task area
lighting fully compliant
to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, no
matter if traditional DSE
equipment or innovative
TFT screens are used.
76 Katalog 2001
Katalog 2001 77
T200
Programme review
Active lighting
components
T200 tubular track arrange-
ments offer a multitude of
combinations with five differ-
ent photometric systems:
Spotlight modules
for high-pressure lamps.
Positionable modules
for halogen lamps, compact
fluorescent lamps and T5
fluorescent lamps.
Translucent modules
for T5 fluorescent lamps.
Louvre luminaires
for T5 fluorescent lamps.
78 Katalog 2001
Design scope
Geometrical arrangements
realised with T200 nodes
or jointed connectors offer
increased design scope,
allowing to enhance the
architectural aspects of the
built environment.
Katalog 2001 79
Spotlight modules for low-voltage halogen lamps
with highly-specular reflector, beam angle 10
Reflectors
For low-voltage halogen
lamps 12 V, 50 W, socket
GY6.35, preferably with axial
filament. In case of reduced
lighting requirements 35 W
or 20 W lamps can also be
used. Highly-specular reflec-
tor made of high-purity an-
odised aluminium. Beam
angle 10.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium swivel frame, inte-
grated aluminium reflector
housing and end adapter ele-
ments in aluminium/plastic
material. Frame and reflec-
tor housing can be pivoted in
two planes by means of the
cardanic suspension. End
adapter elements with inte-
grated electronic transform-
er for incorporation into the
239
239
Electrical connection
90 90 90
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. Mains con-
nection is made within the
rods via box terminals up to
1.5 mm2, which are also
QT/12 V C 0 - C 180 Data table QT/12 V C 0 - C 180 Data table
suitable for through-wiring to No. 2020 No. 2020
the next unit. With electronic
transformers, dimming is
possible when combined
with phase-chop dimmers to
be provided by the client.
80
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg
max. W mm
5953/QT50 3xQT12 50/GY6.35 676 2.2
652dj
Degree of protection IP 20
max. 157 14 14 14
Data table no. 2020
239
I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
Illuminance
Em / lx
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Socket
GY 6.35
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl.
flux / lm factor
LBS QT-ax 12 50W GY6.35 12V
930 1.00
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-50-12-GY 6.35
LBS QT-ax 12 35W GY6.35 12V
600 0.65
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-35-12-GY 6.35
LBS QT-ax 12 20W GY6.35 12V
320 0.34
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-20-12-GY 6.35
Electronic transformers
The adapter units of low-voltage spotlight modules are
equipped as standard with electronic transformers. Essential
characteristics of these devices are a soft lamp start and
easy dimming by means of phase-chop dimmers.
81
Spotlight modules for low-voltage halogen lamps
with specular facetted reflector, beam angle 8
Reflectors
For low-voltage halogen
lamps 12 V, 90 W or 100 W,
socket GY6.35, preferably
with axial filament. In case of
reduced lighting require-
ments 75 W, 50 W or 35 W
lamps can also be used.
With specular facetted sur-
face. Highly-specular reflec-
tor made of high-purity an-
odised aluminium. Beam
angle 8.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium swivel frame, inte-
grated aluminium reflector
housing and end adapter ele-
ments in aluminium/plastic
material. Frame and reflec-
tor housing can be pivoted in
two planes by means of the
cardanic suspension. End
adapter elements with inte-
239
239
82
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg
max. W mm
5953 HO/QT90 3xQT12 35-100/GY6.35 750 3.0
652dZ
Degree of protection IP 20
max. 157 43 43 43
Data table no. 2021
239
I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
Illuminance
Em / lx
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Socket
GY 6.35
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl.
flux / lm factor
LBS QT-ax 12 100W GY6.35 12V
2200 1.22
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-100-12-GY6.35
LBS QT-ax 12 90W GY6.35 12V
1800 1.00
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-90-12-GY6.35
LBS QT-ax 12 75W GY6.35 12V
1450 0.81
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-75-12-GY6.35
LBS QT-ax 12 50W GY6.35 12V
930 0.52
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-50-12-GY6.35
LBS QT-ax 12 35W GY6.35 12V
600 0.33
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-35-12-GY6.35
Brilliant facets
The reflector of the high-lumen spot-
light modules has a surface structure
consisting of multiple precise facets
which lend the reflector a truly bril-
liant appearance.
83
Spotlight modules for mains-voltage halogen lamps
with semi-specular reflector, beam angle 33
Reflectors
For mains-voltage halogen
lamps 230 V, 150 W, socket
E27, preferably with semi-
specular encapsulated bulb.
In case of reduced lighting
requirements 60 W, 75 W or
100 W lamps can also be
used. Semi-specular reflec-
tor made of high-purity an-
odised aluminium. Beam
angle 33.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium swivel frame, inte-
grated aluminium reflector
housing and end adapter ele-
ments in aluminium/plastic
material. Frame and reflec-
tor housing can be pivoted in
two planes by means of the
cardanic suspension. End
adapter elements for inte-
gration into the tubular track
system.
5951 Single module
5952 Double module
5953 Triple module
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. Mains con-
nection is made within the
rods via box terminals up to
QT C 0 - C 180 Data table QT C 0 - C 180 Data table
1.5 mm2, which are also No. 2022 No. 2022
suitable for through-wiring to
the next unit.
84
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg
max. W mm
5953 HO/QT150 3xQT32 60-150/E27 676 3.0
652dN
Degree of protection IP 20
I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
Illuminance
Em / lx
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V
with semi-specular bulb
Socket
E 27
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl.
flux / lm factor
LBS QT32 150W/m E27
2400 1.00
ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-150-320-E27
LBS QT32 100W/m E27
1430 0.60
ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-100-320-E27
LBS QT32 75W/m E27
1050 0.44
ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-75-320-E27
LBS QT32 60W/m E27
780 0.33
ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-60-320-E27
Semi-specular reflector
Semi-specular reflector surfaces create
a very uniform lighting of accentuated
areas. This impression is further pro-
moted by use of mains-voltage halogen
lamps with semi-specular encapsulated
bulb.
85
Spotlight modules for mains-voltage halogen lamps
with PAR reflector, beam angle 10 or 30
Lamps
For mains-voltage halogen
lamps 75 W with PAR reflec-
tor, socket E27. Beam angle
10 or 30.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium swivel frame, inte-
grated aluminium reflector
housing and end adapter ele-
ments in aluminium/plastic
material. Frame and reflec-
tor housing can be pivoted in
two planes by means of the
cardanic suspension. End
adapter elements for inte-
gration into the tubular track
system.
5951 Single module
5952 Double module
5953 Triple module
239
239
Electrical connection
118 166 118 166 166
Luminaires supplied ready 320 498
for connection. Mains con-
nection is made within the
rods via box terminals up to
1.5 mm2, which are also 130 130 130
suitable for through-wiring to
the next unit.
10 30 10 30
10 30
86
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg 10
W mm
5953 HO/QPAR75 3xQPAR75/E27 676 3.0
30
652d
WU
Degree of protection IP 20
max. 157 43 43 43
Data table no. 2023
239
I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
10 30
Illuminance
Em / lx
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V with PAR reflector
Socket
E 27
Lamp designation Beam
angle
Node = Design freedom LBS QPAR30 75W/10 E27
10
ILCOS HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/10
Additional design scope for lighting LBS QPAR30 75W/30 E27
30
installations with the T200 system is ILCOS HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/30
realised by the corresponding nodes Technical information see page 440.
with continuously adjustable angles.
A maximum of four connections is
possible.
87
Spotlight modules for metal halide lamps HIT
with specular facetted reflector, beam angle 13
Application
Spotlight modules for eco-
nomic accentuation lighting
in sales areas, showrooms,
reception halls, conference
rooms, corridors, hotels
and restaurants.
Reflector
For 1 metal halide lamp
35 W or 70 W, preferably in
ceramic version, socket
G12. With facetted brilliant
surface and integrated safe-
ty glass with UV protection.
Highly-specular reflector
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium. Beam angle 13.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium swivel frame with
ballast, integrated aluminium
reflector housing and end
adapter elements in alumini-
um/plastic material. Frame
and reflector housing can be
pivoted in two planes by
means of the cardanic su-
spension. End adapter ele-
ments for integration into
the tubular track system.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with induc-
tive ballast, parallel compen-
sated. Mains connection is
made within the rods via box
terminals up to 1.5 mm2,
which are also suitable for
through-wiring to the next
unit.
88
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg
W mm
5951 HO/HIT35 1xHIT-CRI 35/G12 520 3.3
5951 HO/HIT70 1xHIT-CRI 70/G12 520 3.5
652d
SX
Degree of protection IP 20
max. 157 34
Data table no. 2024
239
30 000
20 000
10 000
I/cd
130
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
Illuminance
Em / lx
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Metal halide lamp
Socket
G 12
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl.
flux / lm factor
LBS HIT 70W G12
6600 1.00
ILCOS MT-70/30/1B-H-G12
LBS HIT 35W G12
3400 0.52
ILCOS MT-35/30/1B-H-G12
89
Spotlight modules for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps HST
with semi-specular reflector, beam angle 33
Application
Spotlight modules for eco-
nomic accentuation lighting
of larger surfaces in sales
areas, showrooms, recep-
tion halls, conference
rooms, corridors, hotels
and restaurants.
Reflector
For 1 high-pressure sodium
vapour lamp 50 W or 100 W,
socket PG12-1, in version
with improved colour render-
ing. Semi-specular reflector
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium. Beam angle 33.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium swivel frame with
ballast, integrated aluminium
reflector housing and end
adapter elements in alumini-
um/plastic material. Frame
and reflector housing can be
pivoted in two planes by
means of the cardanic su-
spension. End adapter ele-
ments for integration into
the tubular track system.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with induc-
tive ballast, parallel compen-
sated. Mains connection is
made within the rods via box
terminals up to 1.5 mm2,
which are also suitable for
through-wiring to the next
unit.
90
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg
W mm
5951 HO/HST50 1xHST-CRI 50/PG12-1 520 3.4
5951 HO/HST100 1xHST-CRI 100/PG12-1 520 4.3
652d
TY
Degree of protection IP 20
I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
Illuminance
Em / lx
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
High-pressure sodium vapour lamp
with improved colour rendering
Socket
PG12-1
Lamp version
e.g. Philips SDW-T
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl.
flux / lm factor
LBS HST-C 100W PG12-1
2300 1.00
ILCOS STH-100-H/E-PG12
LBS HST-C 50W PG12-1
4800 2.09
ILCOS STH-50-H/E-PG12
91
Compact positionable modules with cross-blade louvre RSV
for mains-voltage halogen lamps or with reflection-intensified,
highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX for compact fluorescent lamps
Application
For accentuated lighting
effects in sales areas, show-
rooms, reception halls, con-
ference rooms, corridors,
hotels and restaurants.
Optical system
Direct. Louvre retention by
means of spring-tensioned
clips providing earth conti-
nuity.
RSV
Semi-specular louvre with
graduated concave-profiled
cross blades made of an-
odised aluminium, for nar-
row/wide-angle light distri-
bution.
RPX
Micro-segmented, high-
ly-specular louvre made of
reflection-intensified alumini-
um with a surface purity of
99.99 %.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of
positionable louvre module in
compact version, manu-
vrability 50 for accentu-
ated lighting effects. End
adapter elements in alumini-
um/plastic material assure
safe integration of position-
able louvre modules into the
T200 tubular track system.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. Mains con-
nection is made within the
rods via box terminals up to
1.5 mm2, which are also
suitable for through-wiring
to the next unit.
5961 RPX/TC-D26 E with
electronic control gear (E).
92
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg
W mm W mm
5961 RSV/QTDE150 1xQT-DE150/R7s 376 1.0 5961 RPX/TCD26 E 1xTC-DEL26/G24q-3 450 1.3
652d
R
Degree of protection IP 20
50 50
Data table no. 2026
239
239
95
95
1 Arrangement
2.75
30
0.85
Horizontal
surface
working plane
Wall
z/m
-1.0 0 1.0 0 1.0 y / m
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
QT-DE C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-DEL C 0 - C 180 Data table Suspension length lp 0.5 m
No. 2026 No. 2026
2 Illuminances Horizontal working plane
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A50
2.0
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/1.25/BZ2 BZ1
50 25 1.0
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 150 100
BZ2 BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4/BZ2
0
1.0
y/m
-2.0 -1.0 0 1.0 2.0 x / m
50 2.5
2.0
1.5
300 1.0
200
0.5
100
z/m
-2.0 -1.0 0 1.0 2.0 y / m
4 Photometric characteristics
Reference Lamps Luminous Multipl.
flux / lm factor
5961 RSV/QTDE 150 1 x 150 W 2600 0.85
5961 RPX/TCD 26 E 1 x 26 W 1800 0.49
93
Positionable modules with reflection-intensified,
highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
For accentuated lighting of
expansive surfaces in sales
areas, showrooms, recep-
tion halls, conference
rooms, corridors, hotels
and restaurants.
Optical system
Direct/indirect louvre for
increased lighting efficiency.
Micro-segmented, highly-
specular RPX louvre made of
reflection-intensified alumini-
um with a surface purity of
99.99 %. When positioned
horizontally fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of
positionable louvre module,
manuvrability 50 for
expansive and yet accentu-
ated lighting effects. End
adapter elements in alumini-
um/plastic material assure
safe integration of position-
able louvre modules into the
T200 tubular track system.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with elec-
tronic control gear (E). Mains
connection is made within
the rods via box terminals up
to 1.5 mm2, which are also
suitable for through-wiring to
the next unit.
94
Reference Lamps Length kg
W mm
5961 RPX/24 E 1x24 890 1.7
5961 RPX/39 E 1x39 1190 2.1
5961 RPX/2x24 E 2x24 890 1.8
5961 RPX/2x39 E 2x39 1190 2.3
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
50
Data table no. 2027
239
95
1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
59 594/24W, 894/39W 20 3.9 4.3 6.4 7.2
890/24W, 1190/39W 30 5.4 6.0 9.0 10
40 7.0 7.5 12 13
Area
50 8.5 9.0 14 15
A
in m2 60 10 11 17 18
80 13 14 21 23
100 16 16 26 27
150 23 24 38 40
200 30 31 50 52
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2027 No. 2028 (page 105) Suspension length lp 0.50 m
with overhead reflector
DIN 5040: D62 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
05960 DR/
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: DIN 5040: A60
BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h
CIBSE BZ: Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
NBN L 14-002: 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5961 RPX/39 E + DR 1.0 m
5961 RPX/24 E 1.75 0.95 0.36 0.59
5961 RPX/39 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
5961 RPX/2x24 E 0.91 0.93 0.38 0.55
5961 RPX/2x39 E 0.52 0.93 0.38 0.55
30
2.75 m
500
300
200
100
50
Overhead reflector 05960 DR/ Planning example: wall illumination with positionable
In order to intensify the accentuated lighting effects the posi- louvre module and overhead reflector illuminance
tionable louvre modules for T5 fluorescent lamps can easily distribution (indications in lux)
and rapidly be equipped with additional overhead reflectors Room height: 2.75 m
and are thus converted into purely direct versions. Positionable louvre module: 5961 RPX/39 E
Overhead reflector: 05960 DR/39
Pivoting angle: 30
95
Translucent modules with double-reflection system PST,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
For increased lighting com-
fort in sales areas, show-
rooms, conference rooms
as well as in offices and
financial institutions. Also
suitable for areas with nor-
mal DSE usage where
high-intensity TFT screens
are used.
Optical system
Translucent module in dou-
ble-reflection technology
PST, consisting of primary
diffuser enveloping a primary
reflector. Primary reflector
made of reflection-intensified
aluminium, with slot perfora-
tion allowing a light transmis-
sion of approximately 10 %.
Primary diffuser made of
translucent PLEXIGLAS for
low-loss forward diffusion of
the transmitted light compo-
nent. The ceiling surface
acts as a secondary reflec-
tor and thus creates a com-
fortable luminance contrast
to the translucent module.
Luminaire body
Consisting of chromed brass
fixings for translucent mod-
ules and end adapter ele-
ments in aluminium/plastic
material for safe integration
into the T200 tubular track
system.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with elec-
tronic control gear (E). Mains
connection is made within
the rods via box terminals up
to 1.5 mm2, which are also
suitable for through-wiring to
the next unit.
96
Reference Lamps Length kg
W mm
5971 PST/24 E 1x24 930 1.4
5971 PST/39 E 1x39 1230 1.6
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
53
1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
632/24W, 932/39W 20 5.7 6.6 9.5 11
35 930/24W, 1230/39W 30 7.7 8.8 13 15
40 9.8 11 16 18
Area
50 12 13 20 22
A
in m2 60 14 15 23 25
80 17 19 29 32
100 21 23 35 38
150 30 32 51 54
200 39 42 65 69
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2029 Suspension length lp 0.50 m
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ8 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.5 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ7/1.5/BZ8
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
>> 200 cd/m2 5971 PST/24 E 1.75 0.86 0.65 0.21
5971 PST/39 E 1.00 0.85 0.64 0.21
97
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Micro-segmented louvre
made of reflection-intensified
aluminium with a surface
purity of 99.99 %. Fully com-
pliant to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II,
i.e. L 200 cd/m2 at refer-
ence angle 60 in the
planes C0/C180, C90/C270
and above 65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
RPX highly-specular.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, silver-grey, in
slender profile design. With
232
176
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with elec-
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
tronic control gear (E). Mains No. 2030
connection is made within DIN 5040: D62
the rods via box terminals up
to 1.5 mm2, which are also
suitable for through-wiring
to the next unit.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Indications Page
Rods 102 Luminance limitation LIGHTGATE
Nodes 103 Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60 The energy-saving lighting manage-
Suspensions 103 in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec- ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an
Overhead reflectors 103 tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre- individual, manually operated lighting
Lighting management sponding requirement at international level is the compliance control and a daylight-dependent regu-
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65). lation with integrated presence detec-
Lamp characteristics 444 RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements. tion. Description see page 431.
98
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified,
highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
176
1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
68 1185/28W, 1485/35W Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
1230/28W, 1530/35W
20 3.8 4.2 6.3 6.9
30 5.2 5.8 8.7 9.7
40 6.8 7.2 11 12
Area
50 8.2 8.7 14 15
A
in m2 60 9.6 10 16 17
80 12 13 21 22
100 15 16 26 27
150 22 23 37 38
200 29 30 48 50
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2030 Suspension length lp 0.50 m
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5931 RPX/28 E 1.27 0.95 0.36 0.59
5931 RPX/35 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
5931 RPX/2x28 E 0.65 0.93 0.38 0.55
5931 RPX/2x35 E 0.51 0.93 0.38 0.55
5931 RSX/28 E 1.27 0.95 0.36 0.59
5931 RSX/35 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
5931 RSX/2x28 E 0.65 0.93 0.38 0.55
5931 RSX/2x35 E 0.51 0.93 0.38 0.55
99
Suspended luminaires for task area lighting,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Task area lighting of single-
or twin-desk workstations in
offices and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Special task zone louvre for
increased contrast render-
ing, made of reflection-inten-
sified, highly-specular alu-
minium with a surface purity
of 99.99 %. Fully compliant
to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, silver-grey, in
slender profile design. With
stable and frictionally inte-
grated end caps in die-cast
aluminium which also form a
connecting design element
between the subtly rounded
side profiles. Integrated fix-
ing brackets for mounting to
rods.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with elec-
tronic control gear (E). Mains
connection is made within
the rods via box terminals up
to 1.5 mm2, which are also
suitable for through-wiring to
the next unit.
Lamps W 2 x 80 (T5)
500
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Indications Page
Rods 102
Nodes 103
Suspensions 103
Lighting management
system 431
Lamp characteristics 444
100
Reference Data table Lamps Length kg
No./Page W mm
5941 AD/2x24 E 2033/105 2x24 630 4.9
5941 AD/2x54 E 2032/104 2x54 1230 5.4
5941 AD/2x80 E 2031/100 2x80 1530 6.3
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
232
176
T5
No. 2031 (2x80W)
DIN 5040: D23
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/1/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/0.8/BZ3
101
T200
Accessories and dimensions
5
100 12 50
40
Rods Rods closure 05930 AP Connector 05930 K Rod end caps 05930 E Wall adapter 05930 WA
Aluminium, naturally 1 piece, to close off the upper 1 pair, in-line extruded alu- 1 pair, to close the rod ends 1 pair, to fix rods
anodised, 28 mm side of rods 05930//35. minium connector to be of 05930//35. Chrome- 05930//35 to the wall.
05930/I/35 Light-grey plastic material, inserted without using tools. plated plastic end caps, to Plastic wall adapter, chrome-
1 pair of rods, 1800 mm. 1600 mm long, to be snapped Fits snugly into the rods be fixed to the rods without plated, to be fixed to rods
05930/II/35 into the rod opening without 05930//35 to form an tools. without tools, with entry
1 pair of rods, 3200 mm. tools. To be shortened on invisible joint. possibility for mains cable.
05930/III/35 site.
1 pair of rods, 4800 mm.
Distance module
05930 AM
(not illustrated) 1 piece,
for rods > 2000 mm not
equipped with luminaire.
Angles Distances
b
Charge max. 6.5 kg
110
117
Node adapter 05930 KA Node with pendant Node with wire suspen-
1 piece, die-cast aluminium, structura- suspension 05900 PV sion 05900 SV
lised finish, steel-grey. For the connec- 1 piece, consisting of: 1 piece, consisting of:
270
tion of rods 05930//35 to nodes 1 node for up to four con- 1 node for up to four con-
05900 SV or 05900 PV. nections, angles continu- nections, angles continu-
ously adjustable between ously adjustable between
90 and 270, coated in 90 and 270, coated in
aluminium paint, aluminium paint,
1 steel pendant rod, silver- 1 steel wire, 2 mm, for
grey, 13 mm, 800 mm suspension lengths of up
90 long, with vernier clip, to to 1.5 m,
be shortened on site to 1 ceiling fixing unit, with
the required suspension threaded cap.
lengths,
1 plastic ceiling trim cap,
chrome-plated.
Geometrical arrangements
are versatile design means
in modern interior architec-
ture. The innovative tubular
track system T200 allows
to combine luminaires for
accentuation lighting and
general lighting in a single
lighting system. Exemplary
solutions are shown below.
3200 mm
3300 mm
5000 mm 5000 mm
Data table for luminaire Data table no. 2032 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5941 AD/2 x 54 E
Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
5941 AD/2 x 54 E
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Evaluation
shown on page 101. 2-workstation-office
zone for
Room width m 5.15
contrast
Room depth m 5.00 rendering 200
Room height m 2.70
300
Reflectance values
Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 400
Luminaires 2 x 5941 AD/ 2 x 54 E
0
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
6000 mm 4500 mm
3500 mm
Data table no. 2032 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5941 AD/2 x 54 E Data table for luminaire
Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
5941 AD/2 x 24 E
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Evaluation
2-workstation-office
zone for
shown on page 101.
Room width m 5.15
contrast
Room depth m 5.00 rendering 200
Room height m 2.70
300
Reflectance values
Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 400
Luminaires 2 x 5941 AD/ 2 x 54 E
0
General lighting
Parabolic louvres with an
increased direct component
distinguish the DiVisio ver-
sions for general lighting
from the task area lumi-
naires. The general lighting
louvres are destined for a
classical arrangement of
the luminaires beside the
workstations.
Colour accents
Colours are an effective inte-
rior design means which in
case of DiVisio luminaires
can also enhance a lighting
installation. Decor elements
in blue, green, red and yellow
are available as accessories,
to be mounted without tools
in front of the refraction
arrays. The resulting, deco-
rative colour accents only
affect the refraction fields,
the light colour in the task
area and on the room limiting
surfaces remains practically
the same.
Optical system
Direct/indirect optical sys-
tem for general lighting; con-
sisting of parabolic louvre
and linear refraction ele-
ments. Highly-transmissive
refraction elements made of
polycarbonate, for a uniform
brightness distribution in the
room. Louvre made of re-
flection-intensified aluminium
with a surface purity of
99.99 %.
RSX Semi-specular para-
bolic louvre.
RPX Highly-specular para-
bolic louvre.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium frame to house the
optical system, linear alumin-
ium rods and front-plane bal-
last housing in aluminium/
plastic material.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with
light-grey mains cable
3 x 1.0 mm2, for suspension
lengths of up to 1.70 m,
including earthed conductor,
for luminaire connection at
the ceiling. With electronic
control gear (E).
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2034
DIN 5040: D53
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
112
Reference Lamps LxWxH kg
W mm
5302 RPX/28 E 2x28 1326x420x52 4.6
5302 RPX/35 E 2x35 1626x420x52 5.7
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
>> 200 cd/m2 5302 RPX/28 E 1.27 0.91 0.34 0.57
5302 RPX/35 E 1.00 0.91 0.34 0.57
5302 RSX/28 E 1.27 0.91 0.34 0.57
5302 RSX/35 E 1.00 0.91 0.34 0.57
TFT screens
Innovative optical systems which con-
vince thanks to sensibly reduced lumi-
nances even under steep angles are
specially recommended for lighting of
workstations equipped with TFT
screens.
113
DiVisio for task area lighting,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for workstations
equipped with high-bright-
ness TFT screens.
Optical system
Direct/indirect optical sys-
tem for contrast-promoting
lighting of task zones; con-
sisting of a special task zone
louvre and linear refraction
elements. Task-zone louvre
made of reflection-intensi-
fied, highly-specular alumini-
um, for glare-free lighting of
the working surface, with
balanced shadowing. High-
ly-transmissive refraction
elements made of polycar-
bonate, for a uniform bright-
ness distribution in the
room.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium frame to house the
optical system, linear alumin-
ium rods and front-plane bal-
last housing in aluminium/
plastic material.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with
light-grey mains cable
3 x 1.0 mm2, for suspension
lengths of up to 1.70 m,
including earthed conductor,
for luminaire connection at
the ceiling. With electronic
control gear (E).
Data table no. 2035 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/80 E
Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Indications Page
Suspensions 116
Colour decor elements 117
Lamp characteristics 444
114
Reference Data table Lamps LxWxH kg
no./Page W mm
5302 ADH/49 E 2037/117 2x49 1626x420x52 5.8
5302 ADH/54 E 2036/116 2x54 1326x420x52 4.7
5302 ADH/80 E 2035/114 2x80 1626x420x52 5.8
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
T5
No. 2035 (80 W)
DIN 5040: D23
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5/1/BZ4
115
DiVisio
Accessories
4-point wire suspension 2-point wire suspension 05302 ST Ceiling rose 05900 AN
1 set, to fix one luminaire 5302, 1 set, to fix one luminaire 5302, 1 piece, for the connection of the the
for suspension lengths of up to 1.70 m, for suspension lengths of up to 1.70 m, mains cable in case of ceiling outlets.
consisting of: consisting of: Y Suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit
4 steel wires 1.0 mm, 2 steel wire suspensions in -shape of wire suspensions 05302 S.
4 ceiling fixing units. 1.0 mm,
2 ceiling fixing units, with integrated, Ceiling rose 05900 A
05302 SV additionally with 4 wire tool-free continuous height compensa- (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the
adjusting elements for continuous, tion. connection of the mains cable in case
tool-free height compensation. of ceiling outlets.
05302 S for continuous height com-
pensation by means of screwdriver. Feeding tube 05302 ZR
1 piece, plastic, white, 10 mm,
1700 mm long, to be shortened on site.
To guide and cover the mains cable.
Data table for luminaire Data table no. 2036 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/54 E
Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
5302 ADH/54 E described
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Evaluation
on page 115. 2-workstation-office
zone for
Room width m 5.15 100
contrast
Room depth m 5.00 rendering
Room height m 2.70 200
Reflectance values 300
Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 400
Luminaires 2 x 5302 ADH/ 54 E
0
Data table no. 2037 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/49 E Data table for luminaire
Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
5302 ADH/49 E described
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Evaluation
2-workstation-office
zone for
on page 115.
Room width m 5.15 100
contrast
Room depth m 5.00 rendering
Room height m 2.70 200
Reflectance values 300
Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30
400
Luminaires 2 x 5302 ADH/ 49 E
0
How much
light do peo-
ple require in
the office?
Minimum val-
ues are given
in respective
standards.
The pan-Euro-
pean harmoni- DUAL
sation tends The free-standing DUAL luminaire achieves
to favour individual illumination of single and twin-desk
office lighting workstations. Both the indirect general com-
providing bet- ponent usually switched from the door
ween 500 lx and the additional direct workstation-oriented
in working component are jointly integrated into the
zones and luminaire. Integral intelligence is another
300 lx in option for presence detection and daylight
ambient sur- control.
roundings.
DESKTOP + TASK
The purely indirect free-standing TASK lumi-
naire provides the general lighting. This lumi-
naire is preferably installed at single or twin-
desk workstations and is usually operated by
switchable sockets. Following the DIALOG
concept, the individual DESKTOP luminaire
allows for a workstation-related increase of
the illuminance to more than 500 lx.
DESKTOP + direct/indirect
general lighting
Direct/indirect suspended luminaires in T5
technology suitable for use in rooms with
only 2.5 m height create a very pleasant
lighting atmosphere. DESKTOP luminaires
allow the increase of basic illumination from
300 lx to 500 lx at the workstation, thus
improving acceptance and well-being.
Application
For decorative lighting of
individual workstations in
combination with different
general lighting systems.
Especially recommended in
combination with the TASK
luminaires of the DIALOG
range.
Optical system
Specular reflector made of
anodised aluminium integrat-
ed into the luminaire head.
Distinctive asymmetrical light
distribution for excellent con-
trast rendering is achieved
thanks to the lateral angle of
incidence. The constant hori-
zontal alignment of the light
emitting surface provides
glare-free illumination.
Luminaire body
Luminaire head made of
impact-resistant plastic
material, with integrated
deco-element. Aluminium
stand profiles. Circle-seg-
mented stand foot in
laser-cut steel, 10 mm thick-
ness. Orientable stand pro-
files and ballast housing
fixed to stand foot. Lumi-
naire head, stand profiles
and luminaire foot silver-
grey, with chromed joints.
The luminaire head can be
swung open, thus allowing
rapid lamp replacement and
easy status test.
Electrical connection
With flexible cable, 3 m long,
including earthed plug, for
mains supply. With electronic
control gear (E) and switch.
Data table no. 2038 Luminaire arrangement DESKTOP Isolux curve diagram DESKTOP
Illuminance
0
0
(desk) lx 243
3
450
5
6
0
1
5
0
4
CRFm 1.00
5
0
124
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
W
6001 DT/TCD E 13 1xTC-DEL13/G24q-1 6.1
125
Free-standing workstation luminaires TASK
indirect
Application
For decorative office light-
ing in combination with
DESKTOP individual work-
station luminaires of the
DIALOG range. Especially
recommended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Specular reflector made of
reflection-intensified alumini-
um, for asymmetrical light
distribution providing gener-
ous ceiling illumination above
the working zone. 6021
with cover made of highly-
resistant toughened UV-
absorbing safety glass.
Luminaire body
Luminaire head made of
sheet steel with circular-arc-
profiled contour, end caps
made of die-cast aluminium,
white, solvent-free powder-
coated. With integrated
deco-element. Parallel stand
profiles with integrated bal-
last housing, silver-grey.
Stand profiles inclined
towards the working zone
above approx. 1 m height.
Stand foot made of cast alu-
minium, dark-grey-coated,
with integrated regulation
system for compensating
uneven flooring.
Electrical connection
With flexible cable, 2.5 m
long, including earthed plug,
for mains supply. With elec-
tronic control gear (E). With
integrated earthed socket
and switch. 6024 with Data table no. 2039 Isolux curve diagram TASK + DESKTOP Isolux curve diagram TASK
2-workstation-office
three-stage switch: off, 50 %
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Main working
and 100 %. 6021 with 2-workstation-office
2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
126
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
Reference Lamps/socket kg W
W 6021 AS/HIT150 E 1xHIT-DE150/RX7s + 13.7
6024 AS/TC36 E 4xTC-L36/2G11 13.1 1xQT-DE150/R7s
127
Free-standing workstation luminaires DUAL
direct/indirect
Application
For decorative office light-
ing. Especially recommend-
ed for areas with normal
DSE usage.
Optical system
Consisting of specular
reflector for asymmetrical
indirect light distribution and
parabolic louvre for distinc-
tive asymmetrical direct light
distribution. Specular reflec-
tor made of reflection-inten-
sified aluminium. Parabolic
louvre made of highly-specu-
lar, post-anodised high-purity
aluminium.
Luminaire body
Luminaire head made of
sheet steel with circular-arc-
profiled contour, end caps
made of die-cast aluminium,
white, solvent-free powder-
coated. With integrated
deco-element. Parallel stand
profiles inclined towards the
working zone above approx.
1 m height, silver-grey.
AS With stand foot
made of cast aluminium,
dark-grey-coated, with inte-
grated regulation system for
compensating uneven floor-
ing.
AT With clamp fixing for
attachment to desks with
plate thicknesses between
10 and 50 mm.
Electrical connection
With flexible cable, 2.5 m
long, including earthed plug,
for mains supply. With elec-
tronic control gear (E) offer-
ing increased lamp service
life also for applications with
increased switching frequen-
cy. With integrated earthed
socket and three-stage
switch (indirect, off,
direct + indirect). Sockets Data table no. 2040 Isolux curve diagram DUAL Isolux curve diagram DUAL
2-workstation-office 4-workstation-office
are of Central European
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Main working
standard. Further details, 2-workstation-office
surface 60x60cm
Room width m 3.50
including different socket (DIN 5035 part 8) 400
Room depth m 5.00
options, telephonic or LAN Room height m 2.70
with evaluation
zone for contrast
systems or blank cover Reflectance values rendering 600
plates, are available on Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30
request. Luminaire DUAL 6013 AS/ TC 55
Lamps W 3 x TC - L 55
400 600 600
Light loss factor v=0.8 Contrast
LG With lighting manage- Illuminance rendering factor
300 400
ment system with integrated (whole room) lx 378 CRFm 0.92 200 300
Illuminance (lx)
128
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
W
6013 AS/TC55 E 3xTC-L55/2G11 13.7
6013 AS/TC55 LG 3xTC-L55/2G11 13.7
6014 AS/TCT42 E 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 13.4
6014 AS/TCT42 LG 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 13.4
6014 AT/TCT42 E 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 8.1
Version LG
Thanks to integrated presence detec-
tion, switches are not necessary: the
luminaire is switched on immediately
after movements have been registrated
and switched off 15 minutes after peo-
ple have left the registration area.
129
130 Katalog 2001
Wall-mounted
luminaires
Application
For decorative general and
additional lighting in offices,
financial institutions, confer-
ence rooms, sales areas,
corridors and hotels. Espe-
cially recommended in com-
bination with free-standing
luminaires of the DIALOG
range.
Optical system
Specular reflector made of
reflection-intensified alumini-
um, for generous ceiling illu-
mination thanks to the dis-
tinctive asymmetrical light
control.
6041 with highly-resistant
toughened UV-absorbing
safety glass.
Luminaire body
Luminaire head made of
sheet steel with circular-arc-
profiled contour, end caps
made of die-cast aluminium.
6041 with ballast housing
made of die-cast aluminium.
Luminaire body white, sol-
vent-free powder-coated.
With integrated deco-ele-
ment.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With elec-
tronic control gear (E).
Data table no. 2042 Isolux curve diagram WALL- I + DUAL Isolux curve diagram WALL- I
1-workstation-office with conference area
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
1-workstation-office
Room width m 4.50
Room depth m 5.00
Room height m 2.70
Reflectance values
Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30
Luminaires WALL- I 2 x 6042 UW/TC 24 E
25 50 75 100
0
Lamps W 2 x TC - L 24 400
Luminaire DUAL 6013 AS/ TC 55 E 300
Lamps W 3 x TC - L 55
200 Working plane
Light loss factor v=0.8 above floor 0.85 m
Illuminance Working plane Illuminance (lx)
(whole room) lx 397 above floor 0.75 m Multiplication factor for
(desk) lx 821 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 6041 UW/HIT 70 E:1.22 m 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
Indications Page
Lamp characteristics 444
132
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
Reference Lamps/socket kg W
W 6041 UW/HIT70 E 1xHIT-DE70/RX7s + 4.2
6042 UW/TC24 E 2xTC-L24/2G11 3.2 1xQT-DE150/R7s
Glass cover
Made of highly-resistant
toughened safety glass,
secured against falling
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table HIT-DE C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2042 QT-DE No. 2042 down.
DIN 5040: E03 DIN 5040: E03 06000 GA/TC24 for
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: 6042 UW.
BZ10 BZ10
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ10 BZ10
133
Wall-mounted ambient luminaires WALL-II
indirect or direct/indirect
Application
For decorative general and
additional lighting in offices,
financial institutions, confer-
ence rooms, sales areas,
corridors and hotels. Espe-
cially recommended in com-
bination with free-standing
luminaires of the DIALOG
range.
Optical system
Specular reflector made of
reflection-intensified alumini-
um, for generous wall and
ceiling illumination thanks to
the wide-angle light distribu-
tion.
Luminaire body
Luminaire head made of
sheet steel with circular-arc-
profiled contour, end caps
made of die-cast aluminium,
white, solvent-free powder-
coated.
G with slot-perforated
luminaire body adding a
decorative direct lighting
component.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With elec-
tronic control gear (E).
Data table no. 2043 Isolux curve diagram WALL- II Isolux curve diagram WALL- II
Entrance hall with conference area
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Entrance hall
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
20
Room width m 5.50
Room depth m 5.50
Room height m 2.70 200
Reflectance values 275
Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30
350
Luminaires 6 x 6052 UW-G/ TCT 42 E 400 30 50 80
Mounting height m 2.00
Lamps W 2 x TC - TEL 42
Light loss factor v=0.8
y0.5 1.0 1.5
Illuminance
(whole room) lx 345
Working plane Working plane
Multiplication factors above floor above floor 20
WALL- II 6052 UW/TCT 42 E 0.87 0.85 m 0.85 m
WALL- II 6052 /TCD 18 E 0.35 Illuminance (lx) m x0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 Illuminance (lx) m 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
Indications Page
Lamp characteristics 444
134
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Glass cover
Made of highly-resistant
toughened safety glass,
secured against falling
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table
TC-T(EL) No. 2043 TC-T(EL) No. 2043 down.
DIN 5040: E03 DIN 5040: E03 06000 GA/TCT42 for
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: 6052 UW/TCD18 E and
BZ10 BZ5 6052 UW/TCT42 E.
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ10 BZ5
135
Wall-mounted luminaires
indirect
Application
For decorative, predominant-
ly indirect additional lighting
in offices, financial institu-
tions, conference rooms,
sales areas, lounges, hotels
as well as recuperation facili-
ties, homes for the eldery
and nursing homes. Also
especially recommended for
general lighting in corridors
and bed areas.
Optical system
Predominantly indirect. Ceil-
ing-oriented prismatic cover
made of translucent polycar-
bonate, convex, with internal
channel prisms, transmission
degree 80 %. Internal reflec-
tor. Luminaire body with
slot-perforation at the lower
plane for decorative direct
light emission, with internal
cover made of opal polycar-
bonate.
Luminaire body
Luminaire head made of
extruded aluminium profiles
with circle-segmented con-
tour. End caps and ballast
housing made of die-cast
aluminium. Separate fixing
profile for easy mounting to
wall.
ES 502 W/ solvent-free
powder-coated, white,
ES 502/ silver-grey.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. ES 502E
with electronic control
gear (E), ES 502ED with
dimmable electronic control
gear (ED).
Data table no. 2158 Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
Waiting area
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Waiting area
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
100
Room width m 5.50 150
Room depth m 5.50
Room height m 2.75
Reflectance values
Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30
Luminaires 6 x ES 502 W/TCT 32 E
25 50 75 100
Mounting height m 2.00
Lamps W 2 x TCT 32
Light loss factor v=0.8 200
Illuminance
(whole room) lx 177 250
Working plane Working plane
above floor above floor
0.85 m 0.85 m
Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 Illuminance (lx) m 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
Indications Page
Lamp characteristics 444
136
652d
Degree of protection IP 40
137
Wall-mounted luminaires for decorative lighting
Application
For a decorative lighting with
cosy flair in corridors, wait-
ing and reception areas,
hotels, restaurants, homes
for the eldery, nursing
homes as well as lounges
and dining rooms.
Optical system
Indirect, room-oriented lumi-
naire cover with radiation
openings covered at the
inner side for a decorative
direct light component.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body and cover
made of sheet steel, sil-
ver-grey. Slot-perforated
cover, with user-oriented
convex front cover.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With elec-
tronic control gear (E).
Data table no. 2046 Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
Foyer with waiting areas
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
0.85 m 0.85 m
4022/ TCT 32 E 0.75 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 Illuminance (lx) m x 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
Indications Page
Lamp characteristics 444
138
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg
W
4022/TCT32 E 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 3.1
4022/TCT42 E 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 3.1
139
CENERA,
362
Primary optics
Consisting of primary dif-
fuser enveloping a primary
reflector. Primary reflector
made of reflection-intensified
aluminium with special slot
perforation allowing about
10 % light transmission. Pri-
mary diffuser made of trans-
lucent PLEXIGLAS for virtual-
ly loss-free forward diffusion
of the transmitted share of
light. Easy maintenance of
the primary optics thanks to
front-plane fixings.
Secondary diffuser
Concave (363) or double
concave (360) shape, with
highly-reflective, solvent-free
powder-coating.
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2047 No. 2047
Luminaire body DIN 5040: B30 DIN 5040: B30
Sheet steel, white.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With electronic con-
trol gear (E).
142
Reference Lamps Module D D1 D2 E1 kg
W mm
3633 PST/1xTC55 E 1xTC-L55 600/625 480 72 220 196 5.3
3604 PST/2x24 E 2x24 625 - - - - 7.1
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
143
Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires
with specular hybrid louvre RWX,
for T5 linear fluorescent lamps 16 mm
and compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL
Application Reference Lamps Module D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps Module D D1 E1 kg
For efficient and elegant W mm W mm
lighting of offices, sales 3621 RWX/28 E 1x28 300/312.5 900 174 56 4.4 3622 RWX/28 E 2x28 300/312.5 900 174 96 4.4
areas and showrooms. 3621 RWX/35 E 1x35 300/312.5 1200 174 56 5.5 3622 RWX/35 E 2x35 300/312.5 1200 174 96 5.5
TC-EL 11 W versions particu-
larly recommended for corri-
dors and entrance areas.
Optical system
Micro-segmented hybrid par-
abolic louvre RWX, com-
posed of white aluminium
cross blades and highly-
specular side panels made
of reflection-intensified alu-
minium for increased effi-
ciency.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, refined to
a particularly elegant convex
design. With flush end caps,
inclined by 30 and perfectly
adapted to the luminaire pro-
file. The required recess
depth is only 18 mm.
Electrical connection
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Luminaires supplied ready No. 2048 No. 2048
for connection. With 3-pole DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With electronic con-
trol gear (E).
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
144
Reference Lamps Module D D1 D2 E1 kg
W mm
3622 RWX/TC11 E 2xTC-SEL11 300/312.5 150 111 96 1.6
3623 RWX/14 E 3x14 600/625 480 72 220 137 4.3
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ3/0.75/BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ1 BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3621RWX/28 E 1.26 0.79 0.79 0.00
3621RWX/35 E 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00
3622RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00
3622RWX/35 E 0.51 0.77 0.77 0.00
3622RWX/TC11 E 2.72 0.53 0.53 0.00
3623RWX/14 E 0.90 0.79 0.79 0.00
145
Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires
with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
or compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL
Application Reference Lamps Module D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps Module D D1 E1 kg
For efficient and elegant W mm W mm
lighting of offices, sales 3621 RSX/28 E 1x28 300/312.5 900 174 56 4.4 3622 RSX/28 E 2x28 300/312.5 900 174 96 4.4
areas and showrooms. 3621 RSX/35 E 1x35 300/312.5 1200 174 56 5.5 3622 RSX/35 E 2x35 300/312.5 1200 174 96 5.5
TC-EL 11 W versions particu-
larly recommended for corri-
dors and entrance areas.
Optical system
Micro-segmented, semi-
specular parabolic louvre
RSX made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to CIBSE LG
3, Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2
at reference angle 60
in the planes C0/C180,
C90/C270 and above 65
all-round.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, refined to
a particularly elegant convex
design. With flush end caps,
inclined by 30 and perfectly
adapted to the luminaire pro-
file. The required recess
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
depth is only 18 mm. No. 2049 No. 2049
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
146
Reference Lamps Module D D1 D2 E1 kg
W mm
3622 RSX/TC11 E 2xTC-EL11 300/312.5 150 111 96 1.6
3623 RSX/14 E 3x14 600/625 480 72 220 137 4.3
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ3/0.75/BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ1 BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3621RSX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3621RSX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3622RSX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3622RSX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3622RSX/TC11 E 2.72 0.53 0.53 0.00
3623RSX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
Cost-minimised operation
The lamp package 2 x TC-EL 11 W for 362 luminaires is
predestined for areas with lighting requirements up to
approx. 200 lx. The reduced power consumption, only 28 W
per luminaire, creates the best conditions for efficient light-
ing solutions in corridors, waiting and entrance areas.
147
Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires
with reflection-intensified, highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
or compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL
Application Reference Lamps Module D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps Module D D1 E1 kg
For efficient and elegant W mm W mm
lighting of offices, sales 3621 RPX/28 E 1x28 300/312.5 900 174 56 4.4 3622 RPX/28 E 2x28 300/312.5 900 174 96 4.4
areas, showrooms and finan- 3621 RPX/35 E 1x35 300/312.5 1200 174 56 5.5 3622 RPX/35 E 2x35 300/312.5 1200 174 96 5.5
cial institutions. Especially
recommended for areas
with normal DSE usage.
TC-EL 11 W versions particu-
larly recommended for corri-
dors and entrance areas.
Optical system
Micro-segmented, highly-
specular parabolic louvre
RPX made of reflection-inten-
sified aluminium with a sur-
face purity of 99.99 %. Fully
compliant to CIBSE LG 3,
Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2 at
reference angle 60 in
the planes C0/C180, C90/C270
and above 65 all-round.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, refined to
a particularly elegant convex
design. With flush end caps,
inclined by 30 and perfectly
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
adapted to the luminaire pro- No. 2050 No. 2050
file. The required recess DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
depth is only 18 mm.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
148
Reference Lamps Module D D1 D2 E1 kg
W mm
3622 RPX/TC11 E 2xTC-EL11 300/312.5 150 111 96 1.6
3623 RPX/14 E 3x14 600/625 480 72 220 137 4.3
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ2/1.5/BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ1 BZ2/0.8/BZ1
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3621RPX/28 E 1.21 0.83 0.83 0.00
3621RPX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3622RPX/28 E 0.63 0.81 0.81 0.00
3622RPX/35 E 0.52 0.81 0.81 0.00
3622RPX/TC11 E 2.62 0.56 0.56 0.00
3623RPX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
Cost-minimised operation
The lamp package 2 x TC-EL 11 W for 362 luminaires is
predestined for areas with lighting requirements up to
approx. 200 lx. The reduced power consumption, only 28 W
per luminaire, creates the best conditions for efficient light-
ing solutions in corridors, waiting and entrance areas.
149
CENERA and 362
Indications and accessories for luminaire mounting
The illustrations below show examples of commonly used grid and ceiling systems and the
flange widths admissible for luminaire mounting. The maximum total height for grids plus
ceiling tile is a uniform 56 mm for all kinds of ceilings.
max. 24 mm
Ceilings with
concealed grids
Maximum height of the grid
plus ceiling tile is 56 mm.
Maximum lower flange width max. 56 mm
is 24 mm.
max. 24 mm
max. 12 mm
150
Fixing accessories LIGHTGATE
1 set mounting rails for the mounting of luminaires in system LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving and
ceilings or ceilings with cut-out recess openings. comfort-enhancing lighting management sys-
tem preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
Reference for luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control
03620/1 3621, 3622, 3631 gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated
03620/3 3623, 3633 lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with
integrated presence detection, see page 431.
Vacuum plug 03630 S (not illustrated)
1 piece. Recommended for removing secondary reflectors
of 363 series luminaire bodies.
Reference Reference
362 series 363 series 362 series 363 series
3621/28 E
3621/35 E
3622/28 E 3631 PST/14 E
3622/35 E 3631 PST/28 E
3622/TC 11 E 3631 PST/35 E 3623/14 E 3633 PST/1 x TC 55 E
151
Surface-mounted Numerous series within the
TRILUX louvre luminaire
and suspended range can be equipped with
innovative T5 fluorescent
louvre luminaires lamps in efficient version,
thus creating the best condi-
tions for extremely economic
lighting installations. 526,
504, 505 luminaires can
be additionally equipped with
lumen-rich T5 lamps.
Page 154
152
504, 505 598, 599 500 152 1510
The distinctive style of the Modern slender design with 500 series luminaires The 152 system for T8 flu- The 1510 series for T8
luminaire body for T5 lamps a luminaire height of a mere include versions for both effi- orescent lamps in spherical lamps convinces with techni-
characterises the timeless 62 mm, high efficiency and cient T5 lamps and tried-and- design is not only predes- cal efficiency and a timeless
slender cubist design of this state-of-the-art photometrics tested T8 lamps. A smooth tined for versatile use in profile design. The luminaire
series. Five louvre versions are some of the architectural transition to the new lamp offices. The luminaire body body in combination with the
as well as photometrically and functional merits this technology can therefore be dimensions are also architec- characteristic lateral profiles
optimised diffusers are avail- series has to offer, partly easily planned because both ture-compatible when used in blends in with the room
able for surface-mounted due to the use of T5 fluores- versions feature the same rooms with higher ceilings. architecture without prevail-
and suspended luminaires. cent lamps. architectural design. ing the built environment.
Page 170 Page 184 Page 196 Page 210 Page 222
153
526 The innovative system for
architectural lighting effects
is based on T5 basic lumi-
naires which can be com-
bined to surface-mounted
and suspended luminaires
with optional direct/indirect
light distribution by means of
accessories. Geometrical
arrangements by means of
nodes are possible as well.
154
RWV RWX RSV RSX/65 RPX/65
Designed for An exclusive For high-effi- Semi-specular Superb sur-
even illumi- combination ciency illumi- materials are face clarity
nation of of white nation in becoming offers a lou-
general surfaces and utility cross blades and reflection- areas with public access and increasingly popular in the built vre that is not only fully com-
areas. Uniform, balanced intensified parabolic side non-DSE offices. Narrow/ environment. TRILUX refines pliant to the requirements
light distribution with high panels, offering a neo-classi- wide-angle light distribution the use of these materials with of photometric bodies, but
efficiency. Louvre made of cal appearance with great with excellent efficiency due a reflection-intensified material, also excels with a working
white-coated aluminium or performance. to concave-profiled aluminium offering peak photometric efficiency of up to 80 % in
sheet-steel depending on cross blades and highly-reflec- performance with the benefits direct and over 90 % in
application. tive aluminium side panels. of diffuse distribution. direct/indirect applications.
Page 158 Page 160 Page 162 Page 164 Page 166
155
Light variations
Lighting effects
Versatile lighting tasks call for corre-
sponding lighting solutions. A perfect
choice: the new louvre luminaire
system 526.
156
4 5
4 5
157
Luminaires with white louvre RWV,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Light distribution
Direct/indirect, indirect com-
ponent approx. 45 %. With
perforated overhead reflec-
tors: indirect component
approx. 15 %. With closed
overhead reflectors: indirect
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
Slender and elegant lumi-
naire profile, upper profile
arched towards the ceiling,
made of solvent-free powder-
coated sheet steel, white.
With integrated coupling
brackets for non-interrupted
continuous lines. End caps to
be ordered separately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
plug-in connection terminal No. 2051 No. 2051
for mains supply and further DIN 5040: C43 with perforated overhead
wiring for wires up to
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
2.5 mm2, including earth BZ2/2.5/BZ3 DIN 5040: B53
connection terminal. NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4 BZ2/4/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
E BZ3
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED
With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Overhead reflector 168
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Order. example: cont. line (4 suspended luminaires) Photometrically effective cover options
Through-wiring set 169 4 luminaires 5261 RWV-L/35/49/80 E The lighting effect of 526 luminaires can be effectively var-
Lighting management 1 pair of end caps 05261 K ied by means of optional overhead reflectors. Overhead
system 431 4 perforated overhead reflectors 05261 DG/1500 reflectors DR turn the luminaires into a purely direct system
Multi-Lamp electronic 5 wire suspensions 05000 SN whereas perforated overhead reflectors DG reduce the indi-
control gear 436 3 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58 rect component to approx. 15 %. Prismatic covers for
Lamp characteristics 444 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN improved dust protection are another option.
158
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Accessories for ceiling surface mounting
W mm Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector,
spacer perforated closed
5261 RWV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWV-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWV-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWV-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWV-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWV-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
159
Luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Light distribution
Direct/indirect, indirect com-
ponent approx. 45 %. With
perforated overhead reflec-
tors: indirect component
approx. 15 %. With closed
overhead reflectors: indirect
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
Slender and elegant lumi-
naire profile, upper profile
arched towards the ceiling,
made of solvent-free powder-
coated sheet steel, white.
With integrated coupling
brackets for non-interrupted
continuous lines. End caps to
be ordered separately.
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2053 No. 2053
Electrical connection DIN 5040: C63 with perforated overhead
Luminaires supplied ready
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
for connection. With 5-pole BZ3/1.25/BZ2 DIN 5040: B63
plug-in connection terminal NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
for mains supply and further
NBN L 14-002:
wiring for wires up to BZ2
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal.
E With electronic control
gear in Multi-Lamp technolo-
gy for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Overhead reflector 168
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Ordering example: LIGHTGATE
Through-wiring set 169 individual suspended luminaire, direct The energy-saving lighting manage-
Lighting management 1 luminaire 5261 RWX-L/49 ED ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an
system 431 1 pair of end caps 05261 K individual, manually operated lighting
Multi-Lamp electronic 1 closed overhead reflector 05261 DR/1500 control and a daylight-dependent regu-
control gear 436 2 wire suspensions 05000 SN lation with integrated presence detec-
Lamp characteristics 444 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN tion. Description see page 431.
160
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Accessories for ceiling surface mounting
W mm Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector,
spacer perforated closed
5261 RWX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWX-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWX-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWX-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWX-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWX-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
161
Luminaires with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Light distribution
Direct/indirect, indirect com-
ponent approx. 45 %. With
perforated overhead reflec-
tors: indirect component
approx. 15 %. With closed
overhead reflectors: indirect
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
Slender and elegant lumi-
naire profile, upper profile
arched towards the ceiling,
made of solvent-free powder-
coated sheet steel, white.
With integrated coupling
brackets for non-interrupted
continuous lines. End caps to
be ordered separately.
Electrical connection
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Luminaires supplied ready No. 2055 No. 2055
for connection. With 5-pole DIN 5040: C63 with perforated overhead
plug-in connection terminal
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
for mains supply and further BZ2 DIN 5040: B63
wiring for wires up to NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1/4/BZ2 BZ2
2.5 mm2, including earth
NBN L 14-002:
connection terminal. BZ1/4/BZ2
E
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED
With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Overhead reflector 168
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Order. example: cont. line (4 suspended luminaires) Multi-Lamp electronic control gear
Through-wiring set 169 4 luminaires 5261 RSV-L/35/49/80 E The innovative T5 series 526 convin-
Lighting management 1 pair of end caps 05261 K ces with a striking new feature: the
system 431 5 wire suspensions 05000 SN electronic control gear units in Multi-
Multi-Lamp electronic 1 feeding tube 05000 ZR Lamp technology used in this series
control gear 436 3 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58 allow operation of T5 lamps in different
Lamp characteristics 444 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN wattages.
162
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Accessories for ceiling surface mounting
W mm Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector,
spacer perforated closed
5261 RSV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSV-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSV-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSV-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSV-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSV-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
163
Luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Light distribution
Direct/indirect, indirect com-
ponent approx. 45 %. With
perforated overhead reflec-
tors: indirect component
approx. 15 %. With closed
overhead reflectors: indirect
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
Slender and elegant luminaire
profile, upper profile arched
towards the ceiling, made of
solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. With inte-
grated coupling brackets for
non-interrupted continuous
lines. End caps to be ordered
separately.
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Electrical connection No. 2057 No. 2057
Luminaires supplied ready DIN 5040: C63 with perforated overhead
for connection. With 5-pole
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
plug-in connection terminal BZ2/1/BZ1 DIN 5040: B63
for mains supply and further NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ2/1/BZ1
wiring for wires up to
NBN L 14-002:
2.5 mm2, including earth BZ1
connection terminal.
Indications Page
Overhead reflector 168
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Ordering example: individual surface-mounted Luminance limitation
Through-wiring set 169 luminaire with decorative indirect component Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Lighting management 1 luminaire 5261 RSX-L/80 ED in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
system 431 1 pair of end caps 05261 K tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Multi-Lamp electronic 1 perforated overhead reflector 05261 DG/1500 sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
control gear 436 1 pair of ceiling spacers 05261 AB to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 1 wiring cover 05261 LK RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
164
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Accessories for ceiling surface mounting
W mm Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector,
spacer perforated closed
5261 RSX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSX-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSX-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSX-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSX-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSX-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
165
Luminaires with reflection-intensified,
highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Light distribution
Direct/indirect, indirect com-
ponent approx. 45 %. With
perforated overhead reflec-
tors: indirect component
approx. 15 %. With closed
overhead reflectors: indirect
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
Slender and elegant luminaire
profile, upper profile arched
towards the ceiling, made of
solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. With inte-
grated coupling brackets for
non-interrupted continuous
lines. End caps to be ordered
separately.
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Electrical connection No. 2059 No. 2059
Luminaires supplied ready DIN 5040: C63 with perforated overhead
for connection. With 5-pole
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
plug-in connection terminal BZ2/1.5/BZ1 DIN 5040: B63
for mains supply and further NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ2/0.75/BZ1
wiring for wires up to
NBN L 14-002:
2.5 mm2, including earth BZ1
connection terminal.
Indications Page
Overhead reflector 168
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Ordering example: continuous line with 3 luminaires, Luminance limitation
Through-wiring set 169 ceiling mounting, direct Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Lighting management 3 luminaires 5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
system 431 1 pair of end caps 05261 K tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Multi-Lamp electronic 3 closed overhead reflectors 05261 DR/1500 sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
control gear 436 3 ceiling fixing rails 05261 DBS/1500 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 2 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58 RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
166
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Accessories for ceiling surface mounting
W mm Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector,
spacer perforated closed
5261 RPX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RPX-L/35/49/80/ E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RPX-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RPX-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RPX-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RPX-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RPX-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
167
526
Accessories
90
3284 mm
1492 mm
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
168
End caps 05261 K Wire suspension Ceiling spacer 05261 AB Ceiling fixing rails
1 pair, for front-plane conclusion of individual 1 piece, for suspended mounting of 5261 1 pair, plastic material, Sheet steel, white. To cover
or continuous-line luminaires. Plastic, white. luminaires, consisting of: necessary for direct surface the mains cable for surface
To be attached without using tools. 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, ceiling mounting, distance mounting. Only necessary
1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, between upper luminaire for ceiling outlets located at
2 luminaire fixing clamps, edge and ceiling: 18 mm. the longitudinal luminaire
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. axis outside the front-plane
Wiring cover 05261 LK feeding opening of the
05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to (not illustrated) 1 piece, luminaires. Additional ceiling
Ceiling rose 05900 A* 1.0 m. plastic material, to cover the spacers 05261 AB are not
(not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of 05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up mains cable in case of direct required.
the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. to 2.0 m. ceiling surface mounting. 05261 DBS/1200
for /28/54.
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 05261 DBS/1500
1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, for /35/49/80.
0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary
strain relief systems, fixing screws and
connection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
169
Think cubist, think Braque 504, 505 504, 505 series surface-
mounted and suspended
luminaires are characterised
by their timeless slender
cubist design. In addition to
five different louvre options,
the computer-calculated
prismatic diffuser with inter-
nal reflector systems offers
an interesting photometric
alternative which also con-
vinces with a decorative
indirect component in case Translucent diffuser
of surface mounting. Prismatic
diffuser
made of
PLEXIGLAS with internal
highly-efficient reflector for
narrow/wide-angle light
distribution.
Page 172/178
170
RWV RWX RSV RSX/65 RPX/65
Designed for even An exclusive combi- For high-efficiency Semi-specular Superb sur-
illumination of general nation of white cross illumination in areas materials are face clarity
surfaces and utility blades and reflection- with general public becoming offers a lou-
areas. Uniform, balanced intensified parabolic side access and non-DSE office increasingly popular in the built vre that is not only fully com-
light distribution with high panels, offering a neo-classi- environments. Narrow/wide- environment. TRILUX refines pliant to the requirements
efficiency. Louvre made of cal appearance with great angle light distribution with the use of these materials with of photometric bodies, but
white-coated aluminium or performance. excellent efficiency due to a reflection-intensified material, also excels with a working
sheet-steel depending on concave-profiled aluminium offering peak photometric efficiency of up to 80 % in
application. cross blades and highly-reflec- performance with the benefits direct and over 90 % in
tive aluminium side panels. of diffuse distribution. direct/indirect applications.
Page 172 Page 174 Page 174 Page 176/180 Page 176/180
171
Surface-mounted luminaires with translucent diffuser T
or white louvre RWV,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices, sales areas and
showrooms.
Optical system
Direct.
T
Diffuser in translucent
PLEXIGLAS with internal
channel prisms and high
transmission degree exceed-
ing 80 %. Reflector made of
sheet steel, with highly-
reflective white coating.
RWV
Micro-segmented louvre
RWV made of aluminium,
white, for a uniform light dis-
tribution. Louvre retention by
means of spring-tensioned
clips providing earth continu-
ity. Louvre can be lowered
and hung from either side
without tools.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Elegant
rectangular design with lon-
gitudinal 40 mm rim.
T
Individual luminaire with pre-
mounted end caps. Not suit-
able for non-interrupted con-
tinuous lines.
RWV-L
Luminaire body with integrat-
ed coupling brackets for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines with optically continu-
ous louvres. End caps for
individual luminaires or for
the completion of continu-
ous lines to be ordered
separately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal.
E
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED
With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Translucent diffusers
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclu-
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- sions made of other polymerised
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp methacrylates causes light output
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow ratios that are up to 30 % higher than
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different those of conventional opal diffuser
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages. luminaires.
172
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference** Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
5041 T/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 3.9 5041 RWV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 T/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 4.7 5041 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 T/28 ED 1x28 900 158 3.9 5041 RWV-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2
5041 T/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 4.7 5041 RWV-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 T/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 4.7 5041 RWV-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 T/54 ED 1x54 900 158 3.9 5041 RWV-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 T/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 4.7 5041 RWV-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8
* With premounted end caps. ** End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be
ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/1.5/BZ4 BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ4 BZ3
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L Reference M LB L
direct indirect direct indirect
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
5041 T/28 1.27 0.87 0.85 0.02 5041 RWV-L/28 1.27 0.70 0.70 0.00
5041 T/35 1.00 0.87 0.85 0.02 5041 RWV-L/35 1.00 0.70 0.70 0.00
5041 T/49 0.78 0.86 0.84 0.02 5041 RWV-L/49 0.78 0.68 0.68 0.00
5041 T/54 0.78 0.83 0.81 0.02 5041 RWV-L/54 0.77 0.67 0.67 0.00
5041 T/80 0.60 0.79 0.77 0.02 5041 RWV-L/80 0.57 0.66 0.66 0.00
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
173
Surface-mounted luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX
or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices, sales areas and
showrooms. RSV also for
financial institutions.
Optical system
Direct.
RWX
Micro-segmented hybrid par-
abolic louvre RWX, com-
posed of white aluminium
cross blades and highly-
specular side panels made
of reflection-intensified alu-
minium for increased effi-
ciency.
RSV
Micro-segmented louvre RSV
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium, with graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Elegant
rectangular design with lon-
gitudinal 40 mm rim. Lumi-
naire body with integrated
coupling brackets for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines with optically continu-
ous louvres. End caps for
individual luminaires or for
the completion of continu-
ous lines to be ordered
separately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal.
E
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED
With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear RWX louvre
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces RWX louvres stand for photometric effi-
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- ciency, thanks to a striking combination
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp of white-coated aluminium cross blades
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow and specular side panels made of
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different reflection-intensified aluminium.
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages.
174
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
5041 RWX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RSV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RWX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RWX-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RSV-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RWX-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RSV-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RWX-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RSV-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RWX-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RSV-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RWX-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RSV-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5/BZ3 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/4/BZ3 BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5041 RSV-L/28 1.27 0.71 0.71 0.00
5041 RSV-L/35 1.00 0.71 0.71 0.00
5041 RSV-L/49 0.78 0.70 0.70 0.00
5041 RSV-L/54 0.77 0.69 0.69 0.00
5041 RSV-L/80 0.57 0.67 0.67 0.00
5041 RWX-L/28 1.14 0.79 0.79 0.00
5041 RWX-L/35 0.90 0.79 0.79 0.00
5041 RWX-L/49 0.70 0.78 0.78 0.00
5041 RWX-L/54 0.70 0.76 0.76 0.00
5041 RWX-L/80 0.51 0.75 0.75 0.00
175
Surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct.
Micro-segmented, parabolic
louvre made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
RPX highly-specular.
Louvre retention by means
of spring-tensioned clips
providing earth continuity.
Louvre can be lowered and
hung from either side with-
out tools.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Elegant
rectangular design with lon-
gitudinal 40 mm rim. Lumi-
naire body with integrated
coupling brackets for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines with optically continu-
ous louvres. End caps for
individual luminaires or for
the completion of contin-
uous lines to be ordered
separately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal.
E
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology 25 25
for T5 lamps in different
wattages. 65 65
ED
With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Luminance limitation
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages. RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
176
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
5041 RSX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RPX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RSX-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RPX-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RSX-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RPX-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RSX-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RPX-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RSX-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RPX-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RSX-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RPX-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4/BZ2 BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5041 RPX-L/28 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00
5041 RPX-L/35 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
5041 RPX-L/49 0.78 0.80 0.80 0.00
5041 RPX-L/54 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00
5041 RPX-L/80 0.58 0.75 0.75 0.00
5041 RSX-L/28 1.28 0.81 0.81 0.00
5041 RSX-L/35 1.01 0.81 0.81 0.00
5041 RSX-L/49 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.00
5041 RSX-L/54 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.00
5041 RSX-L/80 0.58 0.76 0.76 0.00
177
Suspended luminaires with translucent diffuser T,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices, sales areas and
showrooms.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Diffuser in translucent
PLEXIGLAS with internal
channel prisms and high
transmission degree exceed-
ing 80 %. With ceiling-orient-
ed PLEXIGLAS cover for
improved dust protection.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Elegant
rectangular design with lon-
gitudinal 40 mm rim. One
premounted end cap, one
end cap is enclosed loose.
Not suitable for non-inter-
rupted continuous lines.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal.
E
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED
With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Translucent diffusers
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclu-
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- sions made of other polymerised
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp methacrylates causes light output
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow ratios that are up to 30 % higher than
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different those of conventional opal diffuser
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages. luminaires.
178
Reference* Lamps D D1 kg
W mm
5051 T/28/54 E 1x28/54 1193 11 3.5
5051 T/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1493 11 4.4
5051 T/28 ED 1x28 1193 11 3.5
5051 T/35 ED 1x35 1493 11 4.4
5051 T/49 ED 1x49 1493 11 4.4
5051 T/54 ED 1x54 1193 11 3.5
5051 T/80 ED 1x80 1493 11 4.4
* With premounted end caps.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/2.5/BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.1 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ4/1.5/BZ5
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5051 T/28 1.27 0.83 0.54 0.29
5051 T/35 1.00 0.83 0.54 0.29
5051 T/49 0.78 0.81 0.53 0.29
5051 T/54 0.78 0.79 0.51 0.28
5051 T/80 0.58 0.77 0.50 0.27
Technical information see page 440.
179
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Micro-segmented, parabolic
louvre made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
RPX highly-specular.
Louvre retention by means
of spring-tensioned clips
providing earth continuity.
Louvre can be lowered and
hung from either side with-
out tools.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Elegant
rectangular design with lon-
gitudinal 40 mm rim. Lumi-
naire body with integrated
coupling brackets for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines with optically continu-
ous louvres. End caps for
individual luminaires or for
the completion of contin-
uous lines to be ordered
separately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal.
E
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
for T5 lamps in different 25 25
wattages.
65 65
ED
With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
PLEXIGLAS cover 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Luminance limitation
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages. RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
180
Reference* Lamps D D1 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 kg
W mm W mm
5051 RSX-L/28/54 E 1x28 1193 11 3.0 5051 RPX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1193 11 3.0
5051 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35 1493 11 3.6 5051 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1493 11 3.6
5051 RSX-L/28 ED 1x28 1193 11 3.0 5051 RPX-L/28 ED 1x28 1193 11 3.0
5051 RSX-L/35 ED 1x35 1493 11 3.6 5051 RPX-L/35 ED 1x35 1493 11 3.6
5051 RSX-L/49 ED 1x49 1493 11 3.6 5051 RPX-L/49 ED 1x49 1493 11 3.6
5051 RSX-L/54 ED 1x54 1193 11 3.0 5051 RPX-L/54 ED 1x54 1193 11 3.0
5051 RSX-L/80 ED 1x80 1493 11 3.6 5051 RPX-L/80 ED 1x80 1493 11 3.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: C53 DIN 5040: C53 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ3/0.75/BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/1.25/BZ1 BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5051 RPX-L/28 1.27 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RPX-L/35 1.00 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RPX-L/49 0.77 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RPX-L/54 0.74 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RPX-L/80 0.54 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RSX-L/28 1.31 0.86 0.50 0.36
5051 RSX-L/35 1.04 0.86 0.50 0.36
5051 RSX-L/49 0.79 0.86 0.50 0.36
5051 RSX-L/54 0.77 0.86 0.50 0.36
5051 RSX-L/80 0.56 0.86 0.50 0.36
181
504, 505
Accessories
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
182
End caps 05041 K Wire suspension Through-wiring sets
1 pair, for front-plane conclusion of individual 1 piece, for suspended mounting of 5041, Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires
or continuous-line luminaires. Plastic, white. 5051 luminaires, consisting of: 1.5 mm2.
To be attached without using tools. 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, 3LV 3-conductor through-wiring
1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, 5LV 5-conductor through-wiring
2 luminaire fixing clamps,
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. Reference for luminaires Length
05051 S for suspension lengths of up to 3700/3LV/36 28/54 1450 mm
1.0 m. 3700/5LV/36 28/54 1450 mm
05051 S/2m for suspension lengths of up 3700/3LV/58 35/49/80 1750 mm
to 2.0 m. 3700/5LV/58 35/49/80 1750 mm
07690/5LV/25m L 25 m
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN*
1 set, for mains feeding for 05051 S,
05051 S/2m, comprising the necessary
strain relief systems, fixing screws and
connection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
90
2618 mm
6436 mm
183
598, 599 This series excels by its
look: luminaire unit height of
only 62 mm, characteristic
design and slender optics
create the best conditions
for architecturally appealing
lighting installations. The
series contains surface-
mounted luminaires for
exclusive use of T5 lamps
and suspended luminaires
in versions which support
both T5 and T8 lamps.
184
RSX/65 RPX/65 RWV RSV RPR/65
Semi-specular Superb sur- Designed for even For high-efficiency Designed for excel-
materials are face clarity illumination of general illumination in areas lent, high-efficiency
becoming offers a surfaces and utility with general public illumination of all
increasingly popular in the built louvre that is not only fully areas. Uniform, balanced access and non-DSE office Cat. II DSE installations.
environment. TRILUX refines compliant to the requirements light distribution with high environments. Narrow/wide- Specular side panels and
the use of these materials with of photometric bodies, but efficiency. Louvre made of angle light distribution with parabolic cross blades
a reflection-intensified material, also excels with a working white-coated aluminium or excellent efficiency due to ensure good all-round glare
offering peak photometric per- efficiency of up to 80 % in sheet steel depending on concave-profiled aluminium limitation.
formance with the benefits of direct and over 90 % in application. cross blades and highly-reflec-
diffuse distribution. direct/indirect applications. tive aluminium side panels.
Page 186/188 Page 186/188 Page 190 Page 190 Page 192
185
Surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct.
Micro-segmented, parabolic
louvre made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
RPX highly-specular.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, in a par-
ticularly elegant design. The
ultra-low profile is enhanced
by a striking 20 mm biplanar
rim. The structuralised, pow-
der-coated die-cast alumini-
um end caps offer both sta-
bility and an elegant connec-
tion between the rounded
side panels. The height over-
all is a mere 62 mm, with
additional 10 mm mounting
distance to ceiling.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
electronic control gear (E).
25 25
Luminaires can also be sup-
plied with dimmable elec- 65 65
tronic control gear, refer-
ence suffix ED,
e.g. 5981N RSX/2x28 ED.
Indications Page
Node 194 T5 fluorescent lamps Luminance limitation
Ceiling fixing rail 195 T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Continuous-line coupling 195 reduced to 16 mm enable compact in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
Through-wiring set 195 dimensions of the optical systems and tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Lighting management the luminaire sections. sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
186
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
5981N RSX/28 E 1x28 900 165 410 4.4 5981N RPX/28 E 1x28 900 165 410 4.4
5981N RSX/35 E 1x35 1200 165 410 5.2 5981N RPX/35 E 1x35 1200 165 410 5.2
5981N RSX/2x28 E 2x28 900 165 410 4.7 5981N RPX/2x28 E 2x28 900 165 410 4.7
5981N RSX/2x35 E 2x35 1200 165 410 5.5 5981N RPX/2x35 E 2x35 1200 165 410 5.5
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1 BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ1
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5981N RPX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
5981N RPX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
5981N RPX/2x28 E 0.83 0.63 0.63 0.00
5981N RPX/2x35 E 0.66 0.63 0.63 0.00
5981N RSX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
5981N RSX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
5981N RSX/2x28 E 0.83 0.63 0.63 0.00
5981N RSX/2x35 E 0.66 0.63 0.63 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
187
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Micro-segmented, parabolic
louvre made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
RPX highly-specular.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, in a par-
ticularly elegant design. The
ultra-low profile is enhanced
by a striking 20 mm biplanar
rim. The structuralised, pow-
der-coated die-cast alumini-
um end caps offer both sta-
bility and an elegant connec-
tion between the rounded
side panels. The height
overall is a mere 62 mm.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
electronic control gear (E).
Indications Page
Node 194
Overhead reflector 194 T5 fluorescent lamps Luminance limitation
Suspensions 195 T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Continuous-line coupling 195 reduced to 16 mm enable compact in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
Through-wiring set 195 dimensions of the optical systems and tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Lighting management the luminaire sections. sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
188
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg
W mm W mm
5991N RSX/28 E 1x28 1185 23 1248 1310 3.7 5991N RPX/28 E 1x28 1185 23 1248 1310 3.7
5991N RSX/35 E 1x35 1485 23 1548 1610 4.2 5991N RPX/35 E 1x35 1485 23 1548 1610 4.2
5991N RSX/2x28 E 2x28 1185 23 1248 1310 4.1 5991N RPX/2x28 E 2x28 1185 23 1248 1310 4.1
5991N RSX/2x35 E 2x35 1485 23 1548 1610 4.6 5991N RPX/2x35 E 2x35 1485 23 1548 1610 4.6
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
. . . .
Data table no. 2067
. . . .
1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 3.8 4.2 6.3 6.9
30 5.2 5.8 8.7 9.7
40 6.8 7.2 11 12
Area
. . . . . . . . . . A
50 8.2 8.7 14 15
in m2 60 9.6 10 16 17
. . . . . . . . . . 80 12 13 21 22
100 15 16 26 27
150 22 23 37 38
200 29 30 48 50
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2067 No. 2067 Suspension length lp 0.50 m
DIN 5040: D62 DIN 5040: C53 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5991N RPX/28 E 1.27 0.95 0.36 0.59
+ 05991 DR/28 1.20 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05991 DG/28 1.22 0.85 0.58 0.27
5991N RPX/35 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
+ 05991 DR/35 0.95 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05991 DG/35 0.96 0.85 0.58 0.27
5991N RPX/2x28 E 0.65 0.93 0.38 0.55
+ 05991 DR/28 0.62 0.73 0.73 0.00
+ 05991 DG/28 0.63 0.83 0.56 0.27
5991N RPX/2x35 E 0.51 0.93 0.38 0.55
+ 05991 DR/35 0.48 0.73 0.73 0.00
+ 05991 DG/35 0.49 0.83 0.56 0.27
5991N RSX/28 E 1.27 0.95 0.36 0.59
+ 05991 DR/28 1.20 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05991 DG/28 1.22 0.85 0.58 0.27
5991N RSX/35 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
+ 05991 DR/35 0.95 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05991 DG/35 0.96 0.85 0.58 0.27
5991N RSX/2x28 E 0.65 0.93 0.38 0.55
+ 05991 DR/28 0.62 0.73 0.73 0.00
+ 05991 DG/28 0.63 0.83 0.56 0.27
5991N RSX/2x35 E 0.51 0.93 0.38 0.55
+ 05991 DR/35 0.48 0.73 0.73 0.00
Overhead reflectors Metallic effect + 05991 DG/35 0.49 0.83 0.56 0.27
Perforated overhead reflectors DG pro- The TRILUX T200 series with individual luminaires in silver-
Technical information see page 440.
vide efficient direct light combined with grey with metallic effect (see page 99) represents an inter-
well-balanced ceiling illumination. esting alternative to the white 59 luminaires. The luminous
Closed overhead reflectors DR convert flux distribution is also variable for this versions thanks to
599 suspended luminaires into purely colour-adapted overhead reflectors.
direct systems.
189
Suspended luminaires
with white louvre RWV
or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
RWV
Micro-segmented louvre
RWV made of aluminium,
white, for a uniform light
distribution.
RSV
Micro-segmented louvre RSV
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium, with graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, in a par- . . . .
ticularly elegant design. The
. .
ultra-low profile is enhanced
. .
by a striking 20 mm biplanar
rim. The structuralised, pow-
der-coated die-cast alumini-
um end caps offer both sta-
bility and an elegant connec- . . . . . . . . . .
tion between the rounded . . . . .
side panels. The height . . . . .
overall is a mere 62 mm.
Electrical connection
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Luminaires supplied ready No. 2068 No. 2068
for connection. With 5-pole DIN 5040: C43 DIN 5040: C43
plug-in connection terminal CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
for mains supply and further BZ2/3/BZ3 BZ2/3/BZ3
wiring for wires up to NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ3
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
low-loss ballasts.
Wire suspension
Luminaires can also be sup- The ceiling-orien-
plied with electronic as well ted surrounding
as with dimmable electronic wire eases the
control gear, reference suf- transversal align-
fix E for non-dimmable ment of the lumi-
electronic control gear or naires. The deco-
ED for dimmable elec- rative ceiling can-
tronic control gear, opy with room for
e.g. 5991N RWV/58 ED. the electrical con-
nection can also
be retro-fitted.
Indications Page
Node 194
Overhead reflector 194 Ultra-low-profile design
Suspensions 195 The 598/599 series sets new
Continuous-line coupling 195 design perspectives with a height of
Through-wiring set 195 only 62 mm and an unmistakable pro-
Lighting management file design differing greatly from tradi-
system 431 tional forms.
Lamp characteristics 444
190
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg
W mm W mm
5991N RSV/36 1x36 1245 23 1308 1370 3.5 5992N RSV/36 2x36 1245 23 1308 1370 4.0
5991N RSV/58 1x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.1 5992N RSV/58 2x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.9
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
. . . .
Data table no. 2068
. . 1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
. . Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.7 3.1 4.6 5.1
30 3.8 4.2 6.3 7.0
40 4.9 5.3 8.2 8.8
Area
50 5.9 6.4 9.9 11
A
in m2 60 7.0 7.4 12 12
. . . . . . . . . .
80 9.0 9.5 15 16
. . . . . 100 11 12 18 19
150 16 17 27 28
. . . . . 200 21 22 35 36
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2068 No. 2068 Suspension length lp 0.50 m
191
Suspended luminaires
with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPR
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Micro-segmented, highly-
specular louvre made of an-
odised aluminium with a sur-
face purity of 99.98 %. Fully
compliant to CIBSE LG 3,
Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2 at
reference angle 60 in
the planes C0/C180, C90/C270
and above 65 all-round.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, in a par-
ticularly elegant design. The
ultra-low profile is enhanced
by a striking 20 mm biplanar
rim. The structuralised, pow-
der-coated die-cast alumini-
um end caps offer both sta-
bility and an elegant connec-
tion between the rounded
side panels. The height
overall is a mere 62 mm.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
low-loss ballasts.
Indications Page
Node 194
Overhead reflector 194 Luminance limitation LIGHTGATE
Suspensions 195 Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60 LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting manage-
Continuous-line coupling 195 in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec- ment system preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
Through-wiring set 195 tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre- equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE
Lighting management sponding requirement at international level is the compliance embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65). and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated pres-
Lamp characteristics 444 RPR louvres meet both requirements. ence detection, see page 431.
192
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg
W mm W mm
5991N RPR/36 1x36 1245 23 1308 1370 3.5 5992N RPR/36 2x36 1245 23 1308 1370 4.0
5991N RPR/58 1x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.1 5992N RPR/58 2x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.9
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
193
598, 599
Accessories
05991 DR/28 for luminaires 5991/28, 5991/2x28. 05991 DG/28 for luminaires 5991/28, 5991/2x28.
05991 DR/35 for luminaires 5991/35, 5991/2x35. 05991 DG/35 for luminaires 5991/35, 5991/2x35.
05991 DR/36 for luminaires 5991/36. 05991 DG/36 for luminaires 5991/36.
05991 DR/58 for luminaires 5991/58. 05991 DG/58 for luminaires 5991/58.
05992 DR/36 for luminaires 5992/36. 05992 DG/36 for luminaires 5992/36.
05992 DR/58 for luminaires 5992/58. 05992 DG/58 for luminaires 5992/58.
194
Wire suspension* Continuous-line coupling 05980 LN Ceiling fixing rails LIGHTGATE
1 piece, for suspended mounting of luminaires 1 piece, aluminium profile, white. For the Sheet steel, white, 20 mm The energy-saving lighting
5991, 5992, consisting of: connection of two surface-mounted lumi- high. To cover the mains management system
1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, naires 598. cables for surface mounting. LIGHTGATE embodies an
1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, Only necessary for ceiling individual, manually operated
2 luminaire fixing clamps, Continuous-line coupling 05990 LN outlets located at the longi- lighting control and a daylight-
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. 1 piece, with integrated wire suspension for tudinal luminaire axis outside dependent regulation with
05000 SN for suspension lenghts of up to the connection of two suspended luminaires the front-plane feeding open- integrated presence detec-
1.0 m. 599, consisting of: ing of the luminaires. tion. Description see page
05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up 1 continuous-line coupling, aluminium profile, 431.
to 2.0 m. white, 05981 DBS/28
1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, for /28 E, /2x28 E.
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, for suspension
1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, lengths of up to 1.0 m, 05981 DBS/35
0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary 2 luminaire fixing clamps, for /35 E, /2x35 E.
strain relief systems, fixing screws and 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white.
connection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
195
500 The 500 series includes
versions for both modern T5
fluorescent lamps as well as
tried-and-tested T8 lamps.
A smooth transition to the
new lamp technology can be
easily planned with 500
luminaires because both
versions share the same
architectural design. The
equipment scope is ade-
quately completed by com-
pact fluorescent lamps. RSX/65
Semi-specular mate-
rials are becoming
increasingly popular
in the built environment.
TRILUX refines the use of
these materials with a reflec-
tion-intensified material,
offering peak photometric
performance with the bene-
fits of diffuse distribution.
Page 198
196
RPX/65 RWV RSV RMV RPR/65
Superb surface Designed for even For high-efficiency Optimised technology ensures Designed for excel-
clarity, aided by illumination of general illumination in areas efficient glare-reduced illumi- lent, high-efficiency
reflection-intensified surfaces and utility with general public nation for office areas and illumination of all
aluminium, offers a louvre areas. Uniform, balanced access and non-DSE office shop premises with limited Cat. II DSE installations.
that is not only fully compli- light distribution with high environments. Narrow/wide- DSE usage. Controlled lumi- Specular side panels and
ant to the requirements of efficiency. Louvre made of angle light distribution with nance distribution with semi- parabolic cross blades
photometric bodies, but also white-coated aluminium or excellent efficiency due to specular parabolic cross ensure good all-round glare
excels with a working effi- sheet steel depending on concave-profiled aluminium blades and side panels made limitation.
ciency of up to 80 % in direct application. cross blades and highly-reflec- of high-purity anodised alu-
applications. tive aluminium side panels. minium.
Page 198 Page 200 Page 202 Page 204 Page 206
197
Surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
Offices, sales areas, show- W mm W mm
rooms and financial institu- 5001 RSX-L/28 E 1x28 900 164 292 450 59 3.4 5002 RSX-L/28 E 2x28 900 164 292 450 4.6
tions. Especially recom- 5001 RSX-L/35 E 1x35 1200 164 292 600 59 4.0 5002 RSX-L/35 E 2x35 1200 164 292 600 5.4
mended for areas with * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
normal DSE usage. separately. separately.
Optical system
Direct.
Micro-segmented, parabolic
louvre made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
RPX highly-specular.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, 70 mm
height overall. The classic
profile (45 on the upper
plane and 55 to the lower
plane) presents an interest-
ing contrast to the ceiling.
Luminaire body with integra-
ted coupling profiles for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines. White convex end
caps, surface in characteris-
tic rib design, to be ordered
separately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
for connection. With 5-pole No. 2070 No. 2070
plug-in connection terminal DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
electronic control gear (E).
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/2.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/2.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ1
Indications Page
End caps 208
Node 208
Suspensions 209 T5 fluorescent lamps Parabolic louvres RSX and RPX
Counter-balance weight 209 T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter The parabolic louvres RSX and RPX,
Through-wiring set 209 reduced to 16 mm enable compact optimised for T5 lamps, convince with
Trunking 426 dimensions of the optical systems and characteristics such as luminance limi-
Lighting management the luminaire sections. tation, high working efficiencies and a
system 431 low construction height.
Lamp characteristics 444
198
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
5001 RPX-L/28 E 1x28 900 164 292 450 59 3.4 5002 RPX-L/28 E 2x28 900 164 292 450 4.6
5001 RPX-L/35 E 1x35 1200 164 292 600 59 4.0 5002 RPX-L/35 E 2x35 1200 164 292 600 5.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE C 71-121: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/2.5/BZ1 BZ2/2.5/BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.3 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ1 BZ1
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5001 RPX-L/28 E 1.22 0.85 0.85 0.00
5001 RPX-L/35 E 1.00 0.85 0.85 0.00
5002 RPX-L/28 E 0.62 0.83 0.83 0.00
5002 RPX-L/35 E 0.51 0.83 0.83 0.00
5001 RSX-L/28 E 1.22 0.85 0.85 0.00
5001 RSX-L/35 E 1.00 0.85 0.85 0.00
5002 RSX-L/28 E 0.62 0.83 0.83 0.00
5002 RSX-L/35 E 0.51 0.83 0.83 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
199
Surface-mounted luminaires
with white louvre RWV
Optical system
Direct.
Micro-segmented louvre
RWV made of aluminium,
white, for uniform light
distribution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, 70 mm
height overall. The classic
profile (45 on the upper
plane and 55 to the lower
plane) presents an interest-
ing contrast to the ceiling.
Luminaire body with integra-
ted coupling profiles for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines. White convex end
caps, surface in characteris-
tic rib design, to be ordered
separately for 36, 58,
end caps for /TC18 are
premounted.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. /TC18 with
3-pole, /36, /58 with
5-pole plug-in connection
terminal for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table
low-loss ballasts. No. 2071
DIN 5040: A50
Luminaires can also be sup- CIBSE BZ:
plied with non-dimmable BZ3
electronic control gear, NBN L 14-002:
BZ3
36, 58 luminaires addi-
tionally also with dimmable
electronic control gear.
Reference suffix E for Decorative
non-dimmable and ED for finish
dimmable electronic control The end caps of
gear, e.g. 5001 RWV/36 ED. the 500 series
luminaires are
perfectly adapted
to the luminaire
body design. The
even contours
together with the
striking rib profile
contribute effec-
tively to the
Indications Page sophisticated
End caps 208 design of this
Node 208 luminaire series.
Suspensions 209 Made of impact- Exact fixing
Counter-balance weight 209 resistant, PVC- Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp sup-
Through-wiring set 209 free and UV- ports made of stainless steel offer
Trunking 426 stabilised ma- ideal, durable positioning of compact
Lighting management terial. fluorescent lamps with a single-ended
system 431 socket and a small cross-section.
Lamp characteristics 444
200
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
5001 RWV-L/36 1x36 900 191 346 450 59 3.9 5002 RWV-L/36 2x36 900 191 346 450 6.0
5001 RWV-L/58 1x58 1200 192 348 600 59 5.0 5002 RWV-L/58 2x58 1200 192 348 600 7.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
201
Surface-mounted luminaires
with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Optical system
Direct.
Micro-segmented louvre RSV
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium, with graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, 70 mm
height overall. The classic
profile (45 on the upper
plane and 55 to the lower
plane) presents an interest-
ing contrast to the ceiling.
Luminaire body with integra-
ted coupling profiles for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines. White convex end
caps, surface in characteris-
tic rib design, to be ordered
separately for 36, 58,
end caps for /TC18 are
premounted.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. /TC18 with
3-pole, /36, /58 with
5-pole plug-in connection
terminal for wires up to
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table
2.5 mm2, including earth No. 2072
connection terminal. With DIN 5040: A50
low-loss ballasts. CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
Luminaires can also be sup- NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
plied with non-dimmable
electronic control gear,
36, 58 luminaires addi-
tionally also with dimmable
electronic control gear.
Reference suffix E for
non-dimmable and ED for
dimmable electronic control
gear, e.g. 5001 RSV/36 ED.
Indications Page
End caps 208
Node 208
Suspensions 209 Design and technics LIGHTGATE
Counter-balance weight 209 The harmonious appearance is due to a The energy-saving lighting manage-
Through-wiring set 209 perfect unity of luminaire body and end ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an
Trunking 426 caps. Additional interior end caps pro- individual, manually operated lighting
Lighting management vide mechanical stability and exception- control and a daylight-dependent regu-
system 431 al rigidity. lation with integrated presence detec-
Lamp characteristics 444 tion. Description see page 431.
202
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
5001 RSV-L/36 1x36 900 191 346 450 59 3.9 5002 RSV-L/36 2x36 900 191 346 450 6.0
5001 RSV-L/58 1x58 1200 192 348 600 59 5.0 5002 RSV-L/58 2x58 1200 192 348 600 7.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
203
Surface-mounted luminaires
with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
Optical system
Direct.
Micro-segmented louvre
made of semi-specular an-
odised aluminium with a sur-
face purity of 99.98 % for
increased visual comfort due
to a uniform louvre appear-
ance with reduced bright-
ness contrasts.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, 70 mm
height overall. The classic
profile (45 on the upper
plane and 55 to the lower
plane) presents an interest-
ing contrast to the ceiling.
Luminaire body with integra-
ted coupling profiles for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines. White convex end
caps, surface in characteris-
tic rib design, to be ordered
separately for 36, 58,
end caps for /TC18 are
premounted.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. /TC18 with
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table
3-pole, /36, /58 with No. 2156
5-pole plug-in connection DIN 5040: A50
terminal for wires up to CIBSE BZ:
2.5 mm2, including earth BZ1
connection terminal. With NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
low-loss ballasts.
Indications Page
End caps 208
Node 208
Suspensions 209 Decorative finish Exact fixing
Counter-balance weight 209 The end caps of the 500 series luminaires are perfectly Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp sup-
Through-wiring set 209 adapted to the luminaire body design. The even contours ports made of stainless steel offer
Trunking 426 together with the striking rib profile contribute effectively to ideal, durable positioning of compact
Lighting management the sophisticated design of this luminaire series. Made of fluorescent lamps with a single-ended
system 431 impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised material. socket and a small cross-section.
Lamp characteristics 444
204
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
5001 RMV-L/36 1x36 900 191 346 450 59 3.9 5002 RMV-L/36 2x36 900 191 346 450 6.0
5001 RMV-L/58 1x58 1200 192 348 600 59 5.0 5002 RMV-L/58 2x58 1200 192 348 600 7.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
205
Surface-mounted luminaires
with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPR
Optical system
Direct.
Micro-segmented, highly-
specular louvre made of an-
odised aluminium with a sur-
face purity of 99.98 %. Fully
compliant to CIBSE LG 3,
Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2 at
reference angle 60 in
the planes C0/C180, C90/C270
and above 65 all-round.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, 70 mm
height overall. The classic
profile (45 on the upper
plane and 55 to the lower
plane) presents an interest-
ing contrast to the ceiling.
Luminaire body with integra-
ted coupling profiles for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines. White convex end
caps, surface in characteris-
tic rib design, to be ordered
separately for 36, 58,
end caps for /TC18 are
premounted.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. /TC18 with
3-pole, /36, /58 with
5-pole plug-in connection
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table
terminal for wires up to No. 2073
2.5 mm2, including earth DIN 5040: A50
connection terminal. With CIBSE BZ:
low-loss ballasts. BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Luminaires can also be sup-
plied with non-dimmable
electronic control gear,
36, 58 luminaires addi-
tionally also with dimmable
electronic control gear.
Reference suffix E for
non-dimmable and ED for
dimmable electronic control
gear, e.g. 5002 RPR/58 ED.
Indications Page
End caps 208
Node 208
Suspensions 209 Luminance limitation Exact fixing
Counter-balance weight 209 Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60 Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp sup-
Through-wiring set 209 in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec- ports made of stainless steel offer
Trunking 426 tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre- ideal, durable positioning of compact
Lighting management sponding requirement at international level is the compliance fluorescent lamps with a single-ended
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65). socket and a small cross-section.
Lamp characteristics 444 RPR louvres meet both requirements.
206
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
5001 RPR-L/36 1x36 900 191 346 450 59 3.9 5002 RPR-L/36 2x36 900 191 346 450 6.0
5001 RPR-L/58 1x58 1200 192 348 600 59 5.0 5002 RPR-L/58 2x58 1200 192 348 600 7.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
207
500
Accessories
End-cap adapter 05001 KA Ceiling node A 03 D Node with wire suspension End caps
1 piece, white, for the connection of single- 1 piece, for up to four con- A 03 S 1 pair, white,
lamp luminaires 5001L with nodes nections, angles continuously 1 piece, consisting of: for 500 luminaires
A 03, with 5-conductor through-wiring set adjustable between 90 and 1 node as described in 05001 K for 5001L.
1.5 mm2. 270. Die-cast aluminium, A 03 D, 05002 K for 5002L.
white. 1 steel wire, 2.0 mm, for
110
suspension lengths of up
Distance plate 05000 DD to 1.5 m,
(not illustrated) 1 pair, white 1 ceiling fixing unit.
130 plastic material, for distance Required counter-balance
ceiling mounting of luminaires weights are described on
5001 in combination with page 209.
nodes A 03 D. One pair of
ceiling distance plates is Ceiling rose 05900 A*
90 required per luminaire. (not illustrated), 1 piece, for
the connection of the mains
cable in case of ceiling out-
lets.
Ordering example:
Geometrical arrangement according to the
draft opposite with 8 luminaires
90 5001 RPX-L/35 E, wire suspensions,
5-conductor through-wiring set.
8 luminaires 5001 RPX-L/35 E
8 end-cap adapters 05001 KA
3244 mm
208
Wire suspension Feeding tube Through-wiring sets
1 piece, consisting of: 1 piece, plastic, white, 10 mm, to be Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires
1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, shortened site. To guide and cover the 1.5 mm2.
1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, mains cable. 3LV 3-conductor through-wiring
2 luminaire fixing clamps, 05000 ZR 1 m long, in combination with 5LV 5-conductor through-wiring
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. 05000 SN,
05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination Reference for luminaires Length
1.0 m. with 05000 SN/2m or A 03 S with 05900 AN. 3700/3LV/36 L/36, L/28 1450 mm
05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up 3700/5LV/36 L/36, L/28 1450 mm
to 2.0 m. Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 3700/3LV/58 L/58, L/35 1750 mm
1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, 3700/5LV/58 L/58, L/35 1750 mm
0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary 07690/5LV/25m L 25 m
strain relief systems, fixing screws and con-
nection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
Counter-balance weights
Required for 1-lamp luminaires with low-loss
ballasts or 1- and 2-lamp luminaires with
electronic control gear, when fixing to node
suspensions A 03 S and to suspended
trunkings 07690.
209
152
210
The extensive 152 range
with white louvres, semi-
specular cross-blade louvres
as well as highly- and semi-
specular parabolic louvres is
suitable for the most versa-
tile applications. The lumi-
naires, conceived to realise
non-interrupted continuous
lines, can also be used as
individual luminaires thanks
to end cap accessories.
The series contains direct RWV RSV RMV RPV/65
surface-mounted luminaires Designed for even For high-effi- Optimised technology ensures Efficient
and direct/indirect suspended illumination of general ciency illumi- efficient glare-reduced illumi- glare-free
luminaires. surfaces and utility nation in nation for office areas and illumination
areas. Uniform, balanced non-DSE office environments. shop premises with limited for all areas with DSE usage.
light distribution with high Narrow/wide-angle light DSE usage. Controlled lumi- Controlled luminance distri-
efficiency. Louvre made of distribution with excellent nance distribution with semi- bution with highly-specular
white-coated aluminium or efficiency due to concave- specular parabolic cross parabolic cross blades and
sheet steel depending on profiled aluminium cross blades and side panels made side panels made of high-
application. blades and highly-reflective of high-purity anodised alu- purity anodised aluminium.
aluminium side panels. minium.
211
Surface-mounted luminaires
with white louvre RWV
or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, with semi-circu-
lar upper section. With ceil-
ing fixing rail. Solvent-free
powder-coated luminaire
body, white. Luminaire body
with integrated coupling
brackets for precisely
aligned continuous lines.
End caps to be ordered
separately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
C 0 - C 180 Data table C 0 - C 180 Data table
2.5 mm2, including earth No. 0051 No. 0051 Data table no. 0051
connection terminal. With DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 1 Number of luminaires
conventional ballasts. CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ2/2.5/BZ3 BZ2 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.8 3.2 4.7 5.3
Luminaires can also be sup- NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
30 3.9 4.3 6.5 7.2
BZ3 BZ3
plied with electronic control Area
40 5.0 5.4 8.4 9.0
50 6.1 6.5 10 11
gear, reference suffix E, A
60 7.2 7.7 12 13
in m2
e.g. 1522/158 RSV-L E. 80 9.3 9.8 15 16
100 11 12 19 20
150 17 17 28 29
200 22 22 36 37
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
212
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
1522/136 RSV-L 1x36 1100 90 134 6.8 1522/236 RSV-L 2x36 1100 90 134 8.2
1522/158 RSV-L 1x58 1400 90 134 8.3 1522/258 RSV-L 2x58 1400 90 134 10.2
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
213
Surface-mounted luminaires
with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Optical system
Direct.
RMV
Semi-specular parabolic lou-
vre. Increased visual comfort
due to a uniform louvre
appearance with reduced
brightness contrasts. For
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. Louvre made of
anodised aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.98 %.
RPV
Highly-specular parabolic
louvre. Luminance limited to
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle above 65. Louvre
made of anodised aluminium
with a surface purity of
99.98 %.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, with semi-circu-
lar upper section. With ceil-
ing fixing rail. Solvent-free
powder-coated luminaire
body, white. Luminaire body
with integrated coupling
brackets for precisely
aligned continuous lines.
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
End caps to be ordered No. 0053 Data table no. 0053
separately. DIN 5040: A60 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
Electrical connection BZ1 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.7 3.0 4.5 5.0
Luminaires supplied ready NBN L 14-002:
30 3.9 4.1 6.5 6.9
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
for connection. With 3-pole Area
40 5.0 5.3 8.4 8.9
50 6.1 6.5 10 11
plug-in connection terminal A
60 7.3 7.6 12 13
in m2
for mains supply and further 80 9.4 9.9 16 16
wiring for wires up to 100 12 12 19 20
150 18 18 29 29
2.5 mm2, including earth 200 23 23 38 38
connection terminal. With Calculation parameters
conventional ballasts. Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Luminaires can also be sup- Suspension length lp 0.00 m
plied with electronic control 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
gear, reference suffix E, g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
e.g. 1522/158 RPV-L E. Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
Node 220
End caps 221
Through-wiring set 221
Emergency light 428
Lamp characteristics 444
214
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
1522/136 RPV-L 1x36 1100 90 134 6.8 1522/236 RPV-L 2x36 1100 90 134 8.2
1522/158 RPV-L 1x58 1400 90 134 8.3 1522/258 RPV-L 2x58 1400 90 134 10.2
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
215
Suspended luminaires
with white louvre RWV
or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, with semi-circu-
lar upper section. Solvent-
free powder-coated lumi-
naire body, white, with inte-
grated coupling brackets for
precisely aligned continuous
lines. End caps to be
ordered separately. . . . .
Electrical connection . . . .
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
C 0 - C 180 Data table C 0 - C 180 Data table
connection terminal. With No. 0056 No. 0056 Data table no. 0056
conventional ballasts. DIN 5040: C53 DIN 5040: C53 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
Luminaires can also be sup- BZ2 BZ4 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.9 3.3 4.7 5.4
plied with electronic control NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
30 3.9 4.3 6.5 7.2
BZ3 BZ3
gear, reference suffix E, Area
40 5.0 5.4 8.2 9.0
50 6.0 6.5 9.9 11
e.g. 1523/158 RSV-L E. A
60 7.0 7.6 11 12
in m2
80 8.9 9.6 15 16
100 11 11 18 19
150 16 16 26 27
200 20 21 34 35
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.50 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
216
Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg
W mm W mm
1523/136 RSV-L 1x36 1234 23 6.0 1523/236 RSV-L 2x36 1234 23 7.4
1523/158 RSV-L 1x58 1534 23 7.4 1523/258 RSV-L 2x58 1534 23 9.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
RSV louvre
Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct
glare, thanks to side panels and grad-
uated concave-profiled cross blades
with a cross-section composed of short
parabolic segments.
217
Suspended luminaires
with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
RMV
Semi-specular parabolic lou-
vre. Increased visual comfort
due to a uniform louvre
appearance with reduced
brightness contrasts. For
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. Louvre made of
anodised aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.98 %.
RPV
Highly-specular parabolic
louvre. Luminance limited to
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle above 65. Louvre
made of anodised aluminium
with a surface purity of
99.98 %.
Luminaire body . . . .
Sheet steel, with semi-circu-
lar upper section. Solvent- . . . .
free powder-coated lumi-
naire body, white, with inte-
grated coupling brackets for
precisely aligned continuous
lines. End caps to be
ordered separately.
C 0 - C 180 Data table C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 0058 No. 0058 Data table no. 0058
Electrical connection DIN 5040: D62 DIN 5040: D63 1 Number of luminaires
Luminaires supplied ready CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
for connection. With 3-pole BZ1 BZ1 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.5 2.9 4.2 4.8
plug-in connection terminal NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
30 3.6 3.9 5.9 6.5
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/1.25/BZ1/4/BZ
for mains supply and further Area
40 4.6 4.9 7.5 8.1
50 5.4 5.8 9.1 9.8
wiring for wires up to A
60 6.4 6.9 11 12
in m2
2.5 mm2, including earth 80 8.3 8.8 14 15
connection terminal. With 100 9.9 11 17 18
150 9.9 16 25 26
conventional ballasts. 200 20 20 33 34
Calculation parameters
Luminaires can also be sup- Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
plied with electronic control Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
gear, reference suffix E, Suspension length lp 0.50 m
e.g. 1523/158 RPV-L E. 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.2 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
Overhead reflector 221 precisely calculated perforations with a varying size. See
Prismatic cover 221 accessories.
Counter-balance weight 221
Emergency light 428
Lamp characteristics 444
218
Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg
W mm W mm
1523/136 RPV-L 1x36 1234 23 6.0 1523/236 RPV-L 2x36 1234 23 7.4
1523/158 RPV-L 1x58 1534 23 7.4 1523/258 RPV-L 2x58 1534 23 9.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Luminance limitation
Parabolic louvres with luminances limi-
ted to L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 65 were found effective
when lighting areas with normal DSE
usage.
219
152
Accessories
90
45 90
7285 mm
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
220
Overhead reflectors PLEXIGLAS Offset secondary
1 piece, sheet steel, white. prismatic cover reflectors
Easy attachment to su- 1 piece, to be attached with- 1 piece, solvent-free powder-
spended luminaires by out tools. To protect the coated sheet steel. Devel-
means of screw connection. lamp and the optical system oped in order to stabilise
DR Closed version. For of suspended luminaires ceiling illuminances. Soft
purely downward, direct light against unnecessarily rapid illumination is achieved by
distribution. degradation. precisely calculated perfora-
DG Perforated version. To tions with a varying size
increase the direct compo- 05230 P/36 for luminaires depending on their position.
nent and reduce the indirect 1523/36. This accessory for individual
component. 05230 P/58 for luminaires luminaires 1523 is designed
05230 DR/36 for 1523/58. for use in conjunction with Balanced luminance
1523/36. the 05000 SN wire suspen- transition
05230 DR/58 for sions. The perforated reflectors
1523/58. allow precise control of the
05230 DG/36 for 05230 SER/36 for illuminance projected from the
152336. suspended luminaires upper surface of the luminaire:
05230 DG/58 for 1523/36*. an intelligent and striking
1523/58. solution for soft-lighting.
05230 SER/58 for Fixing by means of 4 fixing
suspended luminaires clamps approx. 50 mm above
1523/58*. the luminaire body on the wire
suspension 05000 SN.
End caps 05230 K End-cap accessories Through-wiring sets Counter-balance weights Safety lighting
1 pair, for front-plane conclu- 05220 KE Heat-resistant, colour-coded 1 piece, necessary for 1-lamp 1522, 1523 series
sion of individual luminaires 1 pair, for front-plane conclu- individual wires 3 x 1.5 mm2. luminaires with conventional luminaires can be equipped
or continuous lines with sion of individual luminaires ballasts or electronic control on site with E14 safety
suspended luminaires 152, or continuous lines with Reference for luminaires gear and 2-lamp luminaires lighting sockets which are
die-cast aluminium, white. surface-mounted luminaires 3700/3LV/36 36 W with electronic control gear simply attached to the louvre.
1522, consisting of: 3700/3LV/58 58 W when fixing to pendant Detailed description and
1 pair of end caps, die-cast suspensions 05000 P or photometrics see page 429.
aluminium, white, node suspensions A 03 S
1 pair of trunking closures, and A 03 P/500. Can be
plastic, white, to finish the fitted without using tools.
integrated ceiling trunking.
Reference for luminaires
05000 A1 1523/136
05000 A2 1523/158
05000 A3 1523/136 E,
1523/158 E
05000 A4 1523/236 E,
1523/258 E
221
1510 1510 surface-mounted T8
louvre luminaires, charac-
terised by their timeless pro-
file design, are the perfect
lighting solution for modern
offices. Computer-calculated
louvre and reflector optics,
spring-tensioned clips and
louvre interchangeability are
just a few of the convincing
characteristics this series
has to offer.
222
RAV RWV RSV RMV RPV/65
Asymmetrical distribution is Designed for even illumina- For high-efficiency illumination Optimised technology ensures Efficient glare-free
one of the most important tion of general surfaces in areas with general public efficient glare-reduced illumi- illumination for office
requirements today. In and utility areas. Uniform, access and non-DSE office nation for office areas and areas, showrooms,
schools, the RAV system has balanced light distribution environments. Narrow/wide- shop premises with limited banks, financial institutions
proven itself to be ideal for with high efficiency. Louvre angle light distribution with DSE usage. Controlled lumi- and all other areas with DSE
board lighting in shops, made of white-coated excellent efficiency due to nance distribution with semi- usage. Controlled luminance
the system excels thanks to aluminium or sheet steel concave-profiled aluminium specular parabolic cross distribution with highly-spec-
directed vertical illuminance. depending on application. cross blades and highly-reflec- blades and side panels made ular parabolic cross blades
tive aluminium side panels. of high-purity anodised alu- and side panels made of high-
minium. purity anodised aluminium.
Page 224 Page 225 Page 226 Page 227 Page 228
223
Surface-mounted luminaires
with asymmetrical reflector RAV
or white louvre RWV
Optical system
Direct.
RAV
Highly-specular reflector
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium, for asymmetrical
light distribution.
RWV
White aluminium louvre for a
uniform light distribution.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of
solvent-free powder-coated D D1 D D2
sheet steel, white. White end E
E
E2
E2
E1 E1
rately.
1249/36W 96 1225/36W
96 1525/58W
1549/58W
14
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
conventional ballasts.
C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 0022 Data table no. 0022
Luminaires can also be sup- DIN 5040: A40 1 Number of luminaires
plied with electronic control CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
gear, reference suffix E, BZ4 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.6 3.0 4.3 5.0
e.g. 1510/158 RAV-L E. NBN L 14-002:
30 3.6 4.0 6.1 6.7
BZ5/1.5/BZ4
40 4.6 5.1 7.7 8.4
Area
50 5.6 6.1 9.3 10
A
in m2 60 6.5 7.1 11 12
80 8.3 9.0 14 15
3.06 m 1.1 m 100 10 11 17 18
150 15 15 24 26
0.3
200 19 20 32 33
300 Calculation parameters
400
500 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
600 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
1.6 m
600
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
500 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
400 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.6 h
300
h = Luminaire height above working plane
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1510/136RAV-L 1.53 0.76 0.76 0.00
1510/158RAV-L 1.00 0.77 0.77 0.00
224
Reference* Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg
W mm
1510/136 RWV-L 1x36 900 174.5 250 47 3.9
1510/158 RWV-L 1x58 1200 174.5 550 47 5.1
1510/236 RWV-L 2x36 900 174.5 250 47 4.7
1510/258 RWV-L 2x58 1200 174.5 550 47 6.1
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
65d
Degree of protection IP 20
D D1 D D2
Data table no. 0023
E E
E2
E2
205
205
E1 E1 1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
1249/36W 96 1225/36W Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
96 1525/58W
1549/58W
14 20 2.9 3.3 4.9 5.5
30 4.1 4.5 6.8 7.5
40 5.2 5.6 8.7 9.4
Area
50 6.3 6.8 10 11
A
in m2 60 7.5 8.0 13 14
80 9.7 10 16 17
100 11 13 20 21
150 18 18 29 30
200 23 23 37 38
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 0023 No. 0023 Suspension length lp 0.00 m
225
Surface-mounted luminaires
with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
or semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
E2
E2
out tools.
205
205
E1 E1
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
C 0 - C 180 Data table C 0 - C 180 Data table
plug-in connection terminal No. 0024 No. 0024 Data table no. 0024
for mains supply and further DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 1 Number of luminaires
wiring for wires up to CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
2.5 mm2, including earth BZ1 BZ1 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.6 2.9 4.4 4.9
connection terminal. With NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
30 3.7 4.0 6.1 6.7
BZ2 BZ2
conventional ballasts. Area
40 4.8 5.1 8.0 8.5
50 5.9 6.2 9.8 10
A
in m2 60 6.9 7.4 12 13
Luminaires can also be sup- 80 8.9 9.5 15 16
plied with electronic control 100 11 12 18 19
150 16 17 27 27
gear, reference suffix E, 200 21 22 36 36
e.g. 1510/158 RSV-L E. Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
226
Reference* Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg
W mm
1510/136 RMV-L 1x36 900 174.5 250 47 3.9
1510/158 RMV-L 1x58 1200 174.5 550 47 5.1
1510/236 RMV-L 2x36 900 174.5 250 47 4.7
1510/258 RMV-L 2x58 1200 174.5 550 47 6.1
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
65d
Degree of protection IP 20
D D1 D D2
Data table no. 2181
E E
E2
E2
205
205
E1 E1 1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
1249/36W 96 1225/36W Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
96 1525/58W
1549/58W
14 20 2.4 2.7 4.0 4.5
30 3.5 3.7 5.8 6.1
40 4.5 4.7 7.4 7.8
Area
50 5.4 5.8 9.1 9.7
A
in m2 60 6.4 6.8 11 11
80 8.4 8.7 14 15
100 10 11 17 18
150 15 16 25 26
200 20 21 34 34
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2181 No. 2181 Suspension length lp 0.00 m
227
Surface-mounted luminaires
with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for areas with nor-
mal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct.
Highly-specular parabolic
louvre. Fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 65. Louvre made
of anodised aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.98 %.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of
solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. White end
caps to be ordered sepa-
rately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
conventional ballasts.
228
Reference* Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg
W mm
1510/136 RPV-L 1x36 900 174.5 250 47 3.9
1510/158 RPV-L 1x58 1200 174.5 550 47 5.1
1510/236 RPV-L 2x36 900 174.5 250 47 4.7
1510/258 RPV-L 2x58 1200 174.5 550 47 6.1
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
65d
Degree of protection IP 20
D D1 D D2
Data table no. 0025
E E
E2
E2
205
205
E1 E1 1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
1249/36W 96 1225/36W Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
96 1525/58W
1549/58W
14 20 2.6 2.9 4.4 4.9
30 3.6 4.0 6.1 6.7
40 4.7 5.0 7.9 8.4
Area
50 5.7 6.1 9.6 10
A
in m2 60 6.8 7.2 11 13
80 8.7 9.3 15 16
100 10 11 18 19
150 16 17 26 27
200 21 21 34 35
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 0025 No. 0025 Suspension length lp 0.00 m
229
Recessed TRILUX recessed louvre
luminaires do not only offer
louvre excellent photometrics, they
are also available in versions
luminaires suitable for mounting in
almost all common ceiling
systems.
230
368, 369 390, 391 136, 236 362 Lighting systems for
Slender louvre optics for T5 The T5 series 390, 391 The T8 series 136, 236 This T5 series offers flexibility air conditioning
lamps and luminaire body convinces with slender are conceived for system in case of suspended system The TRILUX luminaire range
surfaces in a perforated louvre optics and abundant ceilings in module 600 or ceilings in module 300/600 also includes recessed louvre
design are typical charac- recess-mounting options. 625 mm as well as for cut- or 312.5/625 mm. Mounting luminaires for air conditioning.
teristics of this series for Space-saving and architec- out recess openings. The in cut-out openings is possible The necessary information on
system ceilings in mod- turally attractive lighting luminaire range with practice- as well. More information photometrics, air conditioning
ule 312.5/625 mm or solutions can be realised oriented louvres is success- can be found in the section as well as acoustic data are
300/600 mm and cut-out thanks to the markedly fully completed by luminaire Universal recessed and collected in a corresponding
recess openings. slender luminaire bodies. versions with covers. surface-mounted luminaires. catalogue, available upon
request.
231
Overview
Recessed louvre luminaires
Reference Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page
| 1180x278
| 1480x278
| 580x580
| 580x580
| 1226x165
| 1526x165
| 1226x291
| 1526x291
| 605x605
| 605x605
| 605x605
| 1230x292
| 1530x292
| 1230x292
| 1530x292
| 605x605
| 1180x280
| 1480x280
| 1180x280
| 1480x280
| 580x580
| 580x580
1226x85
1226x165
1180x85
1480x85
1180x165
1480x165
233
Recessed luminaires
with white louvre RWV,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Optical system
Micro-segmented louvre
RWV made of aluminium,
white, for a uniform light
distribution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Lateral
decor cover in perforated
design. With front-plane
knock-out openings for heat-
resistant through-wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole,
14 E with 3-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, including
earth connection terminal.
With electronic control
gear (E).
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2084 No. 2084
Luminaires can also be sup- DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
plied with dimmable elec-
tronic control gear, refer-
ence suffix ED,
e.g. 3681 D-RWV/28 ED.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3
234
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
3683 D-RWV/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RWV/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RWV/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1/BZ3 BZ2/1/BZ3 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ3 BZ3
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RWV/28 E 1.26 0.72 0.72 0.00
3681 D-RWV/35 E 1.00 0.72 0.72 0.00
3682 D-RWV/28 E 0.65 0.70 0.70 0.00
3682 D-RWV/35 E 0.52 0.70 0.70 0.00
3683 D-RWV/14 E 0.90 0.72 0.72 0.00
3691 D-RWV/28 E 1.26 0.72 0.72 0.00
3691 D-RWV/35 E 1.00 0.72 0.72 0.00
3692 D-RWV/28 E 0.65 0.70 0.70 0.00
3692 D-RWV/35 E 0.52 0.70 0.70 0.00
3693 D-RWV/14 E 0.90 0.72 0.72 0.00
3694 D-RWV/14 E 0.68 0.72 0.72 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
235
Recessed luminaires
with specular hybrid louvre RWX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Optical system
Micro-segmented hybrid par-
abolic louvre RWX, com-
posed of white aluminium
cross blades and highly-
specular side panels made
of reflection-intensified alu-
minium for increased effi-
ciency.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Lateral
decor cover in perforated
design. With front-plane
knock-out openings for heat-
resistant through-wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole,
14 E with 3-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
up to 2.5 mm2, including No. 2085 No. 2085
earth connection terminal. DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
With electronic control
gear (E).
236
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
3683 D-RWX/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RWX/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RWX/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2 BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RWX/28 E 1.26 0.79 0.79 0.00
3681 D-RWX/35 E 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00
3682 D-RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00
3682 D-RWX/35 E 0.51 0.77 0.77 0.00
3683 D-RWX/14 E 0.90 0.79 0.79 0.00
3691 D-RWX/28 E 1.26 0.79 0.79 0.00
3691 D-RWX/35 E 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00
3692 D-RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00
3692 D-RWX/35 E 0.51 0.77 0.77 0.00
3693 D-RWX/14 E 0.90 0.79 0.79 0.00
3694 D-RWX/14 E 0.68 0.79 0.79 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
237
Recessed luminaires
with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Optical system
Micro-segmented louvre RSV
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium, with graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Lateral
decor cover in perforated
design. With front-plane
knock-out openings for heat-
resistant through-wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole,
14 E with 3-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, including
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
earth connection terminal. No. 2086 No. 2086
With electronic control DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
gear (E).
238
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
3683 D-RSV/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RSV/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RSV/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ3/0.8/BZ2 BZ3/0.8/BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RSV/28 E 1.26 0.69 0.69 0.00
3681 D-RSV/35 E 1.00 0.69 0.69 0.00
3682 D-RSV/28 E 0.65 0.67 0.67 0.00
3682 D-RSV/35 E 0.52 0.67 0.67 0.00
3683 D-RSV/14 E 0.90 0.69 0.69 0.00
3691 D-RSV/28 E 1.26 0.69 0.69 0.00
3691 D-RSV/35 E 1.00 0.69 0.69 0.00
3692 D-RSV/28 E 0.65 0.67 0.67 0.00
3692 D-RSV/35 E 0.52 0.67 0.67 0.00
3693 D-RSV/14 E 0.90 0.69 0.69 0.00
3694 D-RSV/14 E 0.68 0.69 0.69 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
239
Recessed luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Optical system
Micro-segmented, semi-
specular parabolic louvre
RSX made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to CIBSE LG
3, Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2
at reference angle 60
in the planes C0/C180,
C90/C270 and above 65
all-round.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Lateral
decor cover in perforated
design. With front-plane
knock-out openings for heat-
resistant through-wiring.
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2087 No. 2087
Electrical connection DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole,
14 E with 3-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, including
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
240
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
3683 D-RSX/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RSX/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RSX/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1 BZ2/1.5/BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/0.8/BZ1
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RSX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3681 D-RSX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3682 D-RSX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3682 D-RSX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3683 D-RSX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
3691 D-RSX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3691 D-RSX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3692 D-RSX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3692 D-RSX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3693 D-RSX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
3694 D-RSX/14 E 0.68 0.83 0.83 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Luminance limitation
Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
241
Recessed luminaires with reflection-intensified,
highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Optical system
Micro-segmented, highly-
specular parabolic louvre
RPX made of reflection-inten-
sified aluminium with a sur-
face purity of 99.99 %. Fully
compliant to CIBSE LG 3,
Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2 at
reference angle 60 in
the planes C0/C180, C90/C270
and above 65 all-round.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. Lateral
decor cover in perforated
design. With front-plane
knock-out openings for heat-
resistant through-wiring.
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Electrical connection No. 2088 No. 2088
Luminaires supplied ready DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
for connection. With 5-pole,
14 E with 3-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, including
earth connection terminal.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
242
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
3683 D-RPX/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RPX/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RPX/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ1 BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/1/BZ1 BZ2/1/BZ1
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RPX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3681 D-RPX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3682 D-RPX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3682 D-RPX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3683 D-RPX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
3691 D-RPX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3691 D-RPX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3692 D-RPX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3692 D-RPX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3693 D-RPX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
3694 D-RPX/14 E 0.68 0.83 0.83 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
243
Recessed luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX
or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Optical system
RWX
Micro-segmented hybrid par-
abolic louvre RWX, com-
posed of white aluminium
cross blades and highly-
specular side panels made
of reflection-intensified alu-
minium for increased effi-
ciency.
RSV
Micro-segmented louvre RSV
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium, with graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution.
heat-resistant through-
wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
electronic control gear (E).
244
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
3901 RSV/28 E 1x28 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RSV/28 E 2x28 187 171x1230 5.6
3901 RSV/54 E 1x54 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RSV/54 E 2x54 187 171x1230 5.6
3911 RSV/28 E 1x28 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RSV/28 E 2x28 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RSV/35 E 1x35 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSV/35 E 2x35 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RSV/49 E 1x49 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSV/49 E 2x49 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RSV/54 E 1x54 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RSV/54 E 2x54 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RSV/80 E 1x80 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSV/80 E 2x80 187 171x1480 6.1
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ3/0.8/BZ2
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L Reference M LB L
direct indirect direct indirect
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
3901 RWX/28 E 1.27 0.79 0.79 0.00 3901 RSV/28 E 1.27 0.71 0.71 0.00
3901 RWX/54 E 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.00 3901 RSV/54 E 0.77 0.69 0.69 0.00
3902 RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00 3902 RSV/28 E 0.65 0.69 0.69 0.00
3902 RWX/54 E 0.39 0.74 0.76 0.00 3902 RSV/54 E 0.39 0.67 0.67 0.00
3911 RWX/28 E 1.27 0.79 0.79 0.00 3911 RSV/28 E 1.27 0.71 0.71 0.00
3911 RWX/35 E 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00 3911 RSV/35 E 1.00 0.71 0.71 0.00
3911 RWX/49 E 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.00 3911 RSV/49 E 0.78 0.70 0.70 0.00
3911 RWX/54 E 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.00 3911 RSV/54 E 0.77 0.69 0.69 0.00
3911 RWX/80 E 0.58 0.75 0.75 0.00 3911 RSV/80 E 0.57 0.67 0.67 0.00
3912 RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00 3912 RSV/28 E 0.65 0.69 0.69 0.00
3912 RWX/35 E 0.51 0.77 0.77 0.00 3912 RSV/35 E 0.51 0.69 0.69 0.00
3912 RWX/49 E 0.40 0.76 0.76 0.00 3912 RSV/49 E 0.40 0.68 0.68 0.00
3912 RWX/54 E 0.39 0.74 0.74 0.00 3912 RSV/54 E 0.39 0.67 0.67 0.00
3912 RWX/80 E 0.29 0.73 0.73 0.00 3912 RSV/80 E 0.29 0.65 0.65 0.00
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
245
Recessed luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
Offices, sales areas, show- W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
rooms and financial institu- 3901 RSX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RSX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1230 5.6
tions. Especially recom- 3901 RSX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RSX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1230 5.6
mended for areas with 3911 RSX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RSX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1180 5.4
normal DSE usage. 3911 RSX/35 E 1x35 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSX/35 E 2x35 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RSX/49 E 1x49 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSX/49 E 2x49 187 171x1480 6.1
Universal luminaire system
3911 RSX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RSX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1180 5.4
for ceilings with concealed
3911 RSX/80 E 1x80 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSX/80 E 2x80 187 171x1480 6.1
or exposed grids and for
ceilings with cut-out recess
openings.
390 for 625 mm systems,
module = 107 mm (3901) or
187 mm (3902);
391 for 600 mm systems
(35, 49, 80 for
300 mm systems), module =
107 mm (3911) or 187 mm
(3912).
Optical system
Micro-segmented, parabolic
louvre made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
RPX highly-specular.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
sheet steel, white, elegant No. 2229 No. 2229
design with markedly slender DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
shape. With front-plane
knock-out openings for
heat-resistant through-
wiring.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
electronic control gear (E).
246
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
3901 RPX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RPX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1230 5.6
3901 RPX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RPX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1230 5.6
3911 RPX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RPX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RPX/35 E 1x35 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RPX/35 E 2x35 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RPX/49 E 1x49 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RPX/49 E 2x49 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RPX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RPX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RPX/80 E 1x80 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RPX/80 E 2x80 187 171x1480 6.1
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A60 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L Reference M LB L
direct indirect direct indirect
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
3901 RSX/28 E 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00 3901 RPX/28 E 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00
3901 RSX/54 E 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00 3901 RPX/54 E 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00
3902 RSX/28 E 0.65 0.80 0.80 0.00 3902 RPX/28 E 0.65 0.80 0.80 0.00
3902 RSX/54 E 0.39 0.77 0.77 0.00 3902 RPX/54 E 0.39 0.77 0.77 0.00
3911 RSX/28 E 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00 3911 RPX/28 E 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00
3911 RSX/35 E 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00 3911 RPX/35 E 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
3911 RSX/49 E 0.78 0.80 0.80 0.00 3911 RPX/49 E 0.78 0.80 0.80 0.00
3911 RSX/54 E 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00 3911 RPX/54 E 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00
3911 RSX/80 E 0.58 0.75 0.75 0.00 3911 RPX/80 E 0.58 0.75 0.75 0.00
3912 RSX/28 E 0.65 0.80 0.80 0.00 3912 RPX/28 E 0.65 0.80 0.80 0.00
3912 RSX/35 E 0.51 0.80 0.80 0.00 3912 RPX/35 E 0.51 0.80 0.80 0.00
3912 RSX/49 E 0.40 0.78 0.78 0.00 3912 RPX/49 E 0.40 0.78 0.78 0.00
3912 RSX/54 E 0.39 0.77 0.78 0.00 3912 RPX/54 E 0.39 0.77 0.78 0.00
3912 RSX/80 E 0.29 0.73 0.73 0.00 3912 RPX/80 E 0.29 0.73 0.73 0.00
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
Continuous-line versions
390, 391 series luminaires are
also available upon request as versions
for continuous-line mounting with opti-
cally continuous louvres.
247
Recessed luminaires
with white louvre RWV
Optical system
White aluminium louvre RWV
for a uniform light distribu-
tion.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of sol-
vent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. 136,
158, 236, 258,
with front-plane knock-out
openings for heat-resistant
through-wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole,
318, 418 with
3-pole plug-in connection
terminal for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
conventional ballasts.
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 0012 No. 0012
Luminaires can also be sup- DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A50
plied with electronic control CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
gear, reference suffix E, BZ2/2.5/BZ3 BZ2/3/BZ3
e.g. 1361/236 RWV E. NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ3
248
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
2360/318 RWV 3x18 625 605x605 7.1 1361/318 RWV 3x18 600 580x580 6.7
2360/418 RWV 4x18 625 605x605 7.4 1361/418 RWV 4x18 600 580x580 7.0
65d
Degree of protection IP 20
249
Recessed luminaires
with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Optical system
Semi-specular louvre RSV for
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. With graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades to reduce the lumi-
nance contrasts between
luminaire and ceiling. Louvre
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of sol-
vent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. 136,
158, 236, 258,
with front-plane knock-out
openings for heat-resistant
through-wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
for connection. With 5-pole, No. 0013 No. 0013
318, 418 with DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
3-pole plug-in connection CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
terminal for wires up to BZ2/1.25/BZ BZ1
2.5 mm2, including earth NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2 BZ2
connection terminal. With
conventional ballasts.
250
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
2360/318 RSV 3x18 625 605x605 7.1 1361/318 RSV 3x18 600 580x580 6.7
2360/418 RSV 4x18 625 605x605 7.4 1361/418 RSV 4x18 600 580x580 7.0
65d
Degree of protection IP 20
RSV louvre
Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct
glare, thanks to side panels and grad-
uated concave-profiled cross blades
with a cross-section composed of short
parabolic segments.
251
Recessed luminaires
with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
Optical system
Semi-specular parabolic lou-
vre RMV. High visual comfort
due to a uniform louvre
appearance with reduced
brightness contrasts. For
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. Louvre made of
anodised aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.98 %.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of sol-
vent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. 136,
158, 236, 258,
with front-plane knock-out
openings for heat-resistant
through-wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
for connection. With 5-pole, No. 0014 No. 0014
318, 418 with DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A50
3-pole plug-in connection CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
terminal for wires up to BZ1 BZ1
2.5 mm2, including earth NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/1.25/BZ1
connection terminal. With
conventional ballasts.
252
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
2360/318 RMV 3x18 625 605x605 7.1 1361/318 RMV 3x18 600 580x580 6.7
2360/418 RMV 4x18 625 605x605 7.4 1361/418 RMV 4x18 600 580x580 7.0
65d
Degree of protection IP 20
253
Recessed luminaires
with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Optical system
Highly-specular parabolic
louvre RPV. Luminance limit-
ed to L 200 cd/m2 at ref-
erence angle 65, thus
corresponding fully to LG 3,
Cat. II. Louvre made of an-
odised aluminium with a sur-
face purity of 99.98 %.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of sol-
vent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. 136,
158, 236, 258,
with front-plane knock-out
openings for heat-resistant
through-wiring.
Electrical connection
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Luminaires supplied ready No. 0015 No. 0015
for connection. With 5-pole, DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
318, 418 with CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
3-pole plug-in connection BZ1 BZ1
terminal for wires up to NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2 BZ2/1.25/BZ1
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
conventional ballasts.
254
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
2360/318 RPV 3x18 625 605x605 7.1 1361/318 RPV 3x18 600 580x580 6.7
2360/418 RPV 4x18 625 605x605 7.4 1361/418 RPV 4x18 600 580x580 7.0
65d
Degree of protection IP 20
255
Recessed luminaires
with prismatic cover PA
or opal cover OA
Optical system
Cover made of PMMA,
retained by a white-coated
steel frame, can be lowered
and hung from either side.
PA with photometrically
effective prisms to direct the
light primarily onto the work-
ing plane.
OA with opal cover for a
very uniform brightness
impression of the luminaire.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of sol-
vent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. 136,
158, 236, 258,
with front-plane knock-out
openings for heat-resistant
through-wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole,
318, 418 with
3-pole plug-in connection
terminal for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
connection terminal. With No. 0017
conventional ballasts. DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ:
Luminaires can also be sup- BZ2/0.75/BZ3
plied with electronic control NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.75/BZ3
gear, reference suffix E,
e.g. 1361/236 PA E.
256
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
2360/236 PA 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.5 2360/318 PA 3x18 625 605x605 7.4
2360/258 PA 2x58 312.5 1526x291 9.9 2360/418 PA 4x18 625 605x605 7.7
1361/236 PA 2x36 300 1180x278 7.5 1361/318 PA 3x18 600 580x580 7.0
1361/258 PA 2x58 300 1480x278 9.9 1361/418 PA 4x18 600 580x580 7.3
2360/236 OA 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.5 2360/318 OA 3x18 625 605x605 7.4
2360/258 OA 2x58 312.5 1526x291 9.9 2360/418 OA 4x18 625 605x605 7.7
65d
Degree of protection IP 40
257
368, 369
Indications and accessories for recess mounting
In case of lower
ceiling voids between
300 mm and 100 mm
at minimum, mounting
by means of acces-
sories 03680,
03690 is possible.
Ceilings with
cut-out
recess
openings
258
136, 236
Indications and accessories for recess mounting
Accessories
259
Surface-mounted TRILUX diffuser luminaires
allow for extended mainte-
diffuser luminaires nance intervals thanks to
permanent dust protection
of photometrically efficient
system components and
mechanical lamp protection.
Page 262
260
330, 331, 332 1330 F 740 654, 664, CENTA-S
Diffuser luminaires are func- This ultra-slim series features 740 circular luminaires 665, 717 748 circular luminaires
tional luminaires. This equa- the appealing trapezium- with opal diffusers in matt These series which are spe- made of impact-resistant
tion is certainly typical, yet shaped design and the tried- surface offer architectural cially designed for mirror polycarbonate are recom-
these luminaires can meet and-tested technical advan- planning scope because the lighting also include luminaires mended in case of increased
design-oriented require- tages of the 33 series. luminaires can be equipped with integrated sockets requirements as to mechani-
ments as well. 33 series The luminaire height of only with decor rings available in and switches. Wall-mounted cal safety. The high degree of
luminaires convince thanks 74 mm assures a harmon- three colours or also with luminaires 7171 in IP 54 are protection IP 65 is assured
to a modern design with a ious adaptation to the built yellow, red, blue and green recommended for damp or for both ceiling and wall
rectangular, square or circu- environment. PLEXIGLAS rings. corrosive environments. mounting.
lar profile frame.
Page 266 Page 270 Page 276 Page 278 Page 302
261
Luminaires with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Offices, sales areas, loun-
ges, showrooms, class-
rooms, corridors and stair-
wells.
Surface-mounted luminaires
for ceiling and wall mount-
ing with accessories also
as recessed luminaires in
cut-out recess openings,
suspension by means of wire
suspensions, or integration
into T200 is also possible.
Versions 14 W and 24 W
also for mounting in gypsum
ceilings.
Optical system
Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser,
convex, with internal channel
prisms. Sheet steel reflector
with highly-reflective white
coating.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, contours adapt-
ed to convex diffuser, with
integrated wiring channel for
mains supply and further wir-
ing. Plastic end caps, colour-
adapted to luminaire body.
W white-coated,
M silver-grey-coated
with metallic effect.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for mains supply and further
wiring for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal.
E
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED
With dimmable electronic 3331 series luminaires
control gear with 1-10 V convince as totally conform
interface. recessed and surface-
mounted luminaires. Due to
Thanks to limited surface their convex shape with the
temperatures and IP 50 suit- contour-conform luminaire
able for production sites side parts, the luminaires
subject to fire hazards blend in perfectly with the
caused by dust and fibrous surrounding ceiling surfaces.
substance. In case of surface mounting
the optically surrounding
shadow gap provides an
appealing appearance.
Indications Page
Fixing accessories 273
Suspensions 273
Continuous-line coupling 273 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear
Trunking mounting 273 The innovative T5 series 333 convin-
Lighting management ces with a striking new feature: the
system 431 electronic control gear units in Multi-
Multi-Lamp electronic Lamp technology used in this series
control gear 436 allow operation of T5 lamps in different
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages.
262
Reference Lamps Recess kg Reference Lamps Recess kg
W opening/mm W opening/mm
3331 W/14/24 E 1x14/24 572x190 2.4 3331 M/14/24 E 1x14/24 572x190 2.4
3331 W/28/54 E 1x28/54 1172x190 4.2 3331 M/28/54 E 1x28/54 1172x190 4.2
3331 W/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1472x190 4.9 3331 M/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1472x190 4.9
3331 W/14 ED 1x14 572x190 2.4 3331 M/14 ED 1x14 572x190 2.4
3331 W/24 ED 1x24 572x190 2.4 3331 M/24 ED 1x24 572x190 2.4
3331 W/28 ED 1x28 1172x190 4.2 3331 M/28 ED 1x28 1172x190 4.2
3331 W/35 ED 1x35 1472x190 4.9 3331 M/35 ED 1x35 1472x190 4.9
3331 W/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.9 3331 M/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.9
3331 W/54 ED 1x54 1172x190 4.2 3331 M/54 ED 1x54 1172x190 4.2
3331 W/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.9 3331 M/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.9
652do
Degree of protection IP 50
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5 BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.1 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ5 BZ5
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3331 M/14 2.75 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 M/24 1.87 0.74 0.71 0.03
3331 M/28 1.27 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 M/35 1.00 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 M/49 0.78 0.77 0.73 0.03
3331 M/54 0.78 0.74 0.71 0.03
3331 M/80 0.60 0.70 0.67 0.03
3331 W/14 2.75 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 W/24 1.87 0.74 0.71 0.03
3331 W/28 1.27 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 W/35 1.00 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 W/49 0.78 0.77 0.73 0.03
3331 W/54 0.78 0.74 0.71 0.03
3331 W/80 0.60 0.70 0.67 0.03
LIGHTGATE
The energy-saving lighting manage-
ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an
individual, manually operated lighting
control and a daylight-dependent regu-
lation with integrated presence detec-
tion. Description see page 431.
263
Luminaires with translucent PLEXIGLAS diffuser,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Optical system
Translucent PLEXIGLAS dif-
fuser, convex, with internal
channel prisms, transmission
degree > 80 %. Internal
highly-specular reflector,
reflection-intensified.
TS symmetrical,
TA asymmetrical.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, contours adapt-
ed to convex diffuser, with
integrated wiring channel for
mains supply and further wir-
ing. Plastic end caps, colour-
adapted to luminaire body.
W white-coated,
M silver-grey-coated
with metallic effect.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
for mains supply and further No. 2095 No. 2095
wiring for wires up to DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal.
E
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/0.75/BZ5
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/0.75/BZ5
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5
Indications Page
Fixing accessories 273
Suspensions 273
Continuous-line coupling 273 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Tubular track system T200
Trunking mounting 273 The innovative T5 series 333 convin- Special fixing accessories allow the
Lighting management ces with a striking new feature: the integration of colour-adapted luminaires
system 431 electronic control gear units in Multi- 3331 M into the tubular track system
Multi-Lamp electronic Lamp technology used in this series T200. A detailed description of the
control gear 436 allow operation of T5 lamps in different T200 system is featured on page 74.
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages.
264
Reference Lamps Recess kg Reference Lamps Recess kg
W opening/mm W opening/mm
3331 W-TA/49/80 E 1x49/80 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TA/49/80 E 1x49/80 1472x190 4.0
3331 W-TA/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TA/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.0
3331 W-TA/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TA/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.0
652do
Degree of protection IP 50
DIN 5040: A30 DIN 5040: A30 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5/0.75/BZ4/1/BZ5 BZ5/0.75/BZ4/1/BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.1 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ5 BZ5
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3331 M-TS/14 2.75 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 M-TS/24 1.87 0.86 0.82 0.04
3331 M-TS/28 1.27 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 M-TS/35 1.00 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 M-TS/49 0.78 0.89 0.85 0.04
3331 M-TS/54 0.78 0.86 0.82 0.04
3331 M-TS/80 0.60 0.82 0.78 0.03
3331 M-TA/49 0.85 0.81 0.79 0.02
3331 M-TA/80 0.60 0.81 0.79 0.02
3331 W-TS/14 2.75 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 W-TS/24 1.87 0.86 0.82 0.04
3331 W-TS/28 1.27 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 W-TS/35 1.00 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 W-TS/49 0.78 0.89 0.85 0.04
3331 W-TS/54 0.78 0.86 0.82 0.04
3331 W-TS/80 0.60 0.82 0.78 0.03
3331 W-TA/49 0.85 0.81 0.79 0.02
3331 W-TA/80 0.60 0.81 0.79 0.02
265
Surface-mounted luminaires
with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Luminaire body
Trapezium-shaped front and
side sections made of sheet
steel, joined together by cor-
ners made of die-cast zinc,
white. Longitudinal version
with front-plane knock-out
openings for luminaire cou-
pling with heat-resistant
through-wiring.
3323 C Circular luminaire:
Luminaire body made of
sheet steel, circular, white,
surrounded by a profiled
frame.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. Longitudinal
version with 5-pole, other
versions with 3-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, including
earth connection terminal.
With low-loss ballasts.
266
Reference Lamps D E1 kg Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
3323 C/TC11 3xTC-S11 396 198 3.5 3313/TC24 3xTC-L24 300 107 15 5.2
3304/18 4x18 500 250 250 7.9
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 50
267
Surface-mounted luminaires
with prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Luminaire body
Trapezium-shaped front and
side sections made of sheet
steel, joined together by cor-
ners made of die-cast zinc,
white. Longitudinal version
with front-plane knock-out
openings for luminaire cou-
pling with heat-resistant
through-wiring.
3323 C Circular luminaire:
Luminaire body made of
sheet steel, circular, white,
surrounded by a profiled
frame.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. Longitudinal
version with 5-pole, other
versions with 3-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
TC C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
up to 2.5 mm2, including No. 2098 (page 274) No. 2097
earth connection terminal. DIN 5040: A30 DIN 5040: A30
With low-loss ballasts. CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ/1.25/BZ5 BZ/1.25/BZ5
Luminaires can also be sup- NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ5 BZ5
plied with electronic control
gear, reference suffix E,
e.g. 3302 P/36 E.
268
Reference Lamps D E1 kg Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
3323 C-P/TC11 3xTC-S11 396 198 3.5 3313 P/TC24 3xTC-L24 300 107 15 5.2
3304 P/18 4x18 500 250 250 7.9
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 50
269
Surface-mounted luminaires
with PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Optical system
PLEXIGLAS trapezium-
shaped diffuser made in one
piece, particularly stable and
torsionally rigid. Safe reten-
tion by means of internal
spring clips.
O Opal diffuser in stylish,
fine-grained matt surface.
P Diffuser with photometri-
cally effective prisms to
direct the light primarily onto
the working plane.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, slim pro-
file. End caps made of
impact-resistant ABS.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, including
earth connection terminal.
With conventional ballasts.
270
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
1330 F/136 P 1x36 900 192 390 450 20 4.3 1330 F/236 P 2x36 900 192 390 450 20 4.9
1330 F/158 P 1x58 1200 192 390 600 20 5.5 1330 F/258 P 2x58 1200 192 390 600 20 5.8
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Prismatic perfection
TRILUX prismatic diffusers stand for
computer-optimised photometrics, with
thousands of precise elements control-
ling the light by refraction. Use of
high-grade base materials underlines
our devotion to quality and efficiency.
271
333
Accessories
Universal solution
The 333 series is a true
jack-of-all-trades regarding
its mounting possibilities:
the luminaire bodies can be
equally installed to walls or
ceilings. The luminaires can
be surface-mounted, recess-
mounted in cut-out openings
or suspended as individual
or continuous-line luminaires
by means of delicate wire
suspensions. Versions with a
length of almost 600 mm
which can be additionally
mounted in mortar ceilings
or walls by means of recess
frames offer a practice-
oriented lighting solution for
staircases or corridors.
272
Luminaire coupling Fixing accessories 03331 EB Fixing accessories Tubular track system fixing
1 piece, without wiring. For luminaire 1 set, to mount luminaires 3331 03331 ER/600 03331 T200
connection in accordance with the in ceilings with cut-out openings. 1 set, to mount luminaires 1 set, for integration of luminaires
degree of protection and for a defined 3331/14/24 E in mortar surfaces 3331 into the T200 tubular track
distance (60 mm) between the lumi- or walls. system, including connection cable.
naires in case of non-interrupted
continuous lines. Only for surface Detailed description of the T200
mounting system see page 72.
03331 W-L white-coated, for lumi-
naires 3331 W.
03331 M-L silver-grey-coated
with metallic effect, for luminaires
3331 M.
Wire suspension 03331 SE Wire suspension Trunking fixing 03331 TRS Geometrical arrangements
1 pair, for individual luminaires or for 1 piece, for the connection of two 1 set, support brackets and counter- The universal node A 03 offers
continuous-line ends. Steel wires luminaires. Steel wires 1 mm, balance weight to fix luminaires extended planning scope for archi-
1 mm, for suspension lengths of for suspension lengths of up to 1 m, 3331 to trunkings 07690. tecture-enhancing geometrical
up to 1 m, including suspension including luminaire connection A luminaire distance of at least arrangements. It can be easily used
brackets and ceiling caps with element, suspension bracket and 60 mm has to be observed for in case diffuser luminaires 3331
knock-out opening 12 mm, for ceiling cap with knock-out opening trunking mounting. are mounted to trunkings 07690.
sheathed cable* up to 5 x 1.5 mm2. 12 mm, for sheathed cable* up
to 5 x 1.5 mm2. Detailed description of the trunkings
Wiring connection unit 03331 W-SL white-coated, for lumi- 07690 see page 426.
05000 ESBN* naires 3331 W.
1 set, for mains feeding for 03331 03331 M-SL silver-grey-coated
SE, 03331 SL. with metallic effect, for luminaires
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be
3331 M.
provided by the contractor.
273
330
Accessories
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.1 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 2.1 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
Ordering example:
Continuous line (5 lengths) with
luminaires 3302 P/58.
5 luminaires 3302 P/58
1 pair of pendant suspensions
03330 PE-N
4 pendant suspensions
03340 PL-N
4 through-wiring sets 3300/5LV/58
274
Pendant suspension 03330 PE-N Pendant suspension 03340 PL-N Trunkings
1 pair, complete for an individual lumi- 1 piece, for the connection of two lumi- For ceiling mounting and suspended
naire or for the front planes of continu- naires in case of non-interrupted contin- mounting of surface-mounted luminaires.
ous lines. uous lines. Also to be used as wiring channel.
Trunkings made of sheet steel, gal-
Pendant rod, steel, white, 13 mm, Pendant rod, steel, white, 13 mm, vanised, with white polyester coating,
500 mm long, with vernier clip, to be 500 mm long, with vernier clip, to be equipped as standard with stable
shortened on site, including suspension shortened on site, including suspension couplings, galvanised. See page 426.
brackets, luminaire connection elements brackets, luminaire connection elements
and white ceiling caps. and white ceiling caps.
Through-wiring sets
Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual
wires 1.5 mm2, including luminaire
coupling 3300.
3LV 3-conductor through-wiring
5LV 5-conductor through-wiring
Safety lighting
330 series luminaires can be
equipped on site with screwed E14
sockets. Detailed description and
photometrics see page 430.
275
Circular surface-mounted luminaires
with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Optical system
Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
with stylish, fine-grained,
matt surface. Circular diffu-
ser in spherical form, partic-
ularly stable. Safe retention
of the diffuser by means of a
simple bayonet fixing mecha-
nism.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. /TC11,
/TC18 with stainless steel
lamp holders for compact
fluorescent lamps. Suitable
for mounting to ceilings and
walls.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole,
/2xTC9, /TC11,
/2xTCF24, /2xTCF36
with 4-pole plug-in connec-
tion terminal for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. Lumi-
naires for compact fluores-
cent lamps with low-loss bal-
lasts. Luminaires for circular
lamps TR are supplied as
standard with electronic con-
trol gear (E).
PLEXIGLAS coloured decor ring (tool-free installation) Decorative ceiling ring, white
07401 ( 340 mm) for 7401, 07402 ( 440 mm) for Conical ceiling ring made of powder-coated sheet steel,
7402, 07403 ( 560 mm) for 7403. white. Attached to the luminaire body during mounting with-
Blue Green Red Yellow out tools, unified with the luminaire diffuser.
Indications Page 07401 RB 07401 RG 07401 RR 07401 RY 07401 W 349 mm, for 7401N.
Emergency light 428 07402 RB 07402 RG 07402 RR 07402 RY 07402 W 450 mm, for 7402N.
Lamp characteristics 444 07403 RB 07403 RG 07403 RR 07403 RY 07403 W 561 mm, for 7403N.
276
Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
7402N/1xTCF36 1xTC-F36 220 30 2.2 7403N/1xTR22+40 E 1xTR22+1xTR40 396 77 26.5 2.3
7402N/1xTR40 E 1xTR40 220 110 26.5 1.6 7403N/TC11 3xTC-S11 396 198 3.3
7402N/TC11* 2xTC-S11 220 110 2.1 7403N/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24 396 198 3.7
7402N/TC18* 2xTC-L18 220 110 2.2 7403N/2xTCF36 2xTC-F36 396 198 3.7
7402N/E27 1x max. 60 220 30 1.8
* For versions E: E1 = 13 mm, E2 = 62 mm.
652d
Degree of protection IP 40
277
Wall-mounted luminaires
with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Luminaire body
Extruded aluminium, solvent-
free powder-coated, white,
with integrated wiring chan-
nel at the rear for wiring pas-
sage in case of shifted wall
outlet. White-coated end
caps or in version C
chrome-finished end caps.
6651
With optimised length for tile
and mirror dimensions. With
plastic end caps, flat at the
front planes.
6641
With end caps made of
die-cast aluminium, subtly
inclined at the front planes,
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. 6651 supplied as
standard with electronic con-
trol gear (E), 6641 with
low-loss ballasts.
278
Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
6641 C/18 1x18 550 25 27 1.8 6641/18 1x18 550 25 27 1.8
6641 C/36 1x36 800 25 27 2.5 6641/36 1x36 800 25 27 2.5
6641 C/58 1x58 1000 25 27 3.2 6641/58 1x58 1000 25 27 3.2
652d
Degree of protection IP 40
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 3.8 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
End caps
The appearance of the 665 series is
characterised by its functional design
with flat end caps. Aluminium end caps
of the 664 series on the other hand
are subtly inclined and can be optional-
ly equipped with sockets.
279
Wall-mounted luminaires
with PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Optical system
Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser,
made in one piece.
6641 with internal channel
prisms,
6541 P/18 with clear pris-
matic diffuser.
Luminaire body
6641
Extruded aluminium, solvent- Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg
free powder-coated, white. W mm W mm
White-coated end caps or 6641 C-S/18 1x18 550 25 27 40 1.8 6641 S/18 1x18 550 25 27 40 1.8
in version C chrome- 6641 C-St-S/18 1x18 550 25 27 20 1.9 6641 St-S/18 1x18 550 25 27 20 1.9
finished end caps, made of
die-cast aluminium, subtly
inclined at the front planes.
6541
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white.
7171
Glass-fibre reinforced poly-
ester, grey, with internal
reflector made of white poly-
ester, safety class II, pro-
tected against the ingression
of water. Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg Reference Lampen D D1 E1 E2 IP kg
W mm W mm
Equipment 6641 C-St/18 1x18 550 25 27 20 1.9 6641 St/18 1x18 550 25 27 20 1.9
S
With integrated rocker switch.
St
With earthed socket 230 V,
16 A.
St-S
With earthed socket 230 V,
16 A and rocker switch.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with 2-pole
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, 6541,
6641 with additional earth
connection terminal. Ver-
sions St and St-S
with 3-pole connection termi-
nal. 6541, 6641 lumi-
naires can also be supplied
with electronic control gear,
reference suffix E, e.g.
6641 C-St/18 E.
Indications Page
Lamp characteristics 444
280
Reference Lamps D D1 E1* E2 IP kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1* E2 IP kg
W mm W mm
6541/15 1x15 360 71 205 40 1.1 6541 P/18 1x18 510 72 255 40 1.5
6541/18 1x18 510 72 255 40 1.5 * For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm
* For version with electronic control gear: /15 E1 = 280 mm, /18 E1 = 340 mm
65 2d M
7171
Degree of protection IP 40
SN, St, St-S IP 20
7171 IP 54
Short-time operation
The use of electronic starters
leads to reduced start-up
times and to increased lamp
service life. It is therefore
often recommended to
replace glow starters by
electronic starters, e.g. in
bathing areas or sanitary
zones.
281
282
Recessed TRILUX recessed luminaires
with PLEXIGLAS diffuser
diffuser are available for almost all
common ceiling systems.
luminaires
Stable diffusers, reliable
closure mechanisms and
ageing-resistant sealing
guarantee permanent pro-
tection of lamps and optical
systems.
283
Recessed luminaires for strip ceilings
with opal or prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms, locker-rooms, e.g. in
sports halls, indoor swim-
ming-pools and covered
exterior areas.
Optical system
PLEXIGLAS diffuser made in
one piece, particularly sta-
ble. Safe retention of the dif-
fuser by means of internal
spring clips.
4401 F/ With opal
PLEXIGLAS diffuser.
4401 PF/ With
PLEXIGLAS diffuser with pho-
tometrically effective prisms
to direct the light primarily
onto the working plane.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, with later-
al black plastic profiles for
the optical continuation of
the shadow gap. /36,
/58 with front-plane
knock-out openings for
heat-resistant through-
wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. /18 with
3-pole, /36, /58 with
5-pole connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. Sealing and
mechanical protection of the
mains supply and further wir-
ing by means of two grom-
mets. With low-loss ballasts.
284
Reference Lamps Strip ceiling Length kg Reference Lamps Strip ceiling Length kg
W Module mm W Module mm
4401 F/18 1x18 1x100 640 2.9 4401 PF/18 1x18 1x100 640 2.9
4401 F/36 1x36 1x100 1250 4.0 4401 PF/36 1x36 1x100 1250 4.0
4401 F/58 1x58 1x100 1550 5.1 4401 PF/58 1x58 1x100 1550 5.1
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 54
285
Weather-proof TRILUX weather-proof sur-
face-mounted luminaires shine
surface-mounted out thanks to high corrosion
and ageing resistance.
luminaires Highly-resistant materials
also guarantee efficient and
long-term protection against
the ingression of dust and
humidity.
Page 288
286
713 1715 719 CENTA-S WINLIGHT-Q
High-quality opal or pris- The luminaire bodies of the 719 battens are recommend- Weather-proof circular lumi- High lumen packages char-
matic PLEXIGLAS diffusers 1715 series are made ed for interior and exterior naires 748 guarantee a acterise the 798 series.
characterise the architectural of highly-resistant polyester areas which are not working high IP 65-rating for ceiling They are recommended for
design of the tried-and-tested resin, characterised by a areas with general illumination as well as for wall mounting. higher halls as well as for
series. The connection with very low inflammability. requirements. The FF versions Luminaire body and diffuser covered exterior areas.
the flat base luminaire body A further advantage is the are also suitable for produc- are made of impact-resistant IP 54 is achieved in combi-
made of polyester resin is prismatic diffuser made of tion sites exposed to fire polycarbonate. The luminaire nation with glass covers.
effected by means of internal ageing-resistant PLEXIGLAS hazards. Also recommended design can be varied by A detailed description can
spring clips. which is easy to clean thanks for simple working rooms means of attractive decora- be found in the section
to its smooth surface. when equipped with reflectors. tive ceiling rings. Industrial luminaires.
Page 294 Page 296 Page 298 Page 302 Page 422
287
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires ARAGON
with polycarbonate diffuser,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
Ceiling- and wall-mounted
luminaires for damp or cor-
rosive environments and
covered exterior areas. Rec-
ommended for increased
requirements as to mechan-
ical stability.
Optical system
Diffuser made of clear,
impact-resistant and UV-sta-
bilised polycarbonate with
stylish, fine-grained front
planes, smooth exterior fin-
ish, with internal channel
prisms. Diffuser made in one
piece, mechanically stable.
Safe retention of the diffuser
by means of inter-lock pairs
closed without tools.
Luminaire body
Polycarbonate, recyclable,
very low inflammability,
transparant, for additional
indirect light component.
With upper- and front-plane
perforations for mains sup-
ply and further wiring as well
as for through-wiring by
means of heat-resistant
internal wiring. Grommets
are enclosed loose. Internal
wiring to be ordered sepa-
rately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With electronic
control gear (E).
288
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
ARAGON 114 T E 1x14 390 1.6 ARAGON 214 T E 2x14 390 2.5
ARAGON 124 T E 1x24 390 1.6 ARAGON 224 T E 2x24 390 2.5
ARAGON 128 T E 1x28 800 235 475 2.4 ARAGON 228 T E 2x28 800 235 475 3.4
ARAGON 135 T E 1x35 1100 235 475 2.7 ARAGON 235 T E 2x35 1100 235 475 3.8
ARAGON 149 T E 1x49 1100 235 475 2.7 ARAGON 249 T E 2x49 1100 235 475 3.8
ARAGON 154 T E 1x54 800 235 475 2.4 ARAGON 254 T E 2x54 800 235 475 3.4
ARAGON 180 T E 1x80 1100 235 475 2.7
652do
Degree of protection IP 66
DIN 5040: B20 DIN 5040: B31 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ7/4/BZ6 BZ5/1.25/BZ6 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 3.3 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ7/4/BZ6 BZ6
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
ARAGON 114T E 2,75 0.84 0.65 0.19
ARAGON 124T E 1.99 0.80 0.62 0.18
ARAGON 128T E 1.27 0.84 0.65 0.19
ARAGON 135T E 1.00 0.84 0.65 0.19
ARAGON 149T E 0.78 0.83 0.64 0.19
ARAGON 154T E 0.78 0.80 0.62 0.18
ARAGON 180T E 0.60 0.77 0.59 0.17
ARAGON 214T E 1.45 0.81 0.61 0.19
ARAGON 224T E 1.05 0.77 0.58 0.18
ARAGON 228T E 0.67 0.81 0.61 0.19
ARAGON 235T E 0.53 0.81 0.61 0.19
ARAGON 249T E 0.41 0.79 0.60 0.19
ARAGON 254T E 0.41 0.77 0.58 0.18
Technical information see page 440.
289
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires ARAGON
with polycarbonate diffuser,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
S With highly-specular
reflector, reflection-intensi-
fied, for symmetrical light
distribution.
Luminaire body
Polycarbonate, recyclable,
very low inflammability, light-
grey. With upper- and front-
plane perforations for mains
supply and further wiring as
well as for through-wiring by
means of heat-resistant
internal wiring. Grommets
are enclosed loose. Internal
wiring to be ordered sepa-
rately.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ6
NBN L 14-002:
BZ7/2/BZ6
290
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
ARAGON 214 E 2x14 390 2.3 ARAGON 128 S E 1x28 800 235 475 3.2
ARAGON 224 E 2x24 390 2.3 ARAGON 135 S E 1x35 1100 235 475 3.5
ARAGON 228 E 2x28 800 235 475 3.6 ARAGON 149 S E 1x49 1100 235 475 3.5
ARAGON 235 E 2x35 1100 235 475 4.0 ARAGON 154 S E 1x54 800 235 475 3.2
ARAGON 249 E 2x49 1100 235 475 4.0 ARAGON 180 S E 1x80 1100 235 475 3.5
ARAGON 254 E 2x54 800 235 475 3.6
652do
Degree of protection IP 66
DIN 5040: B30 DIN 5040: A40 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5/2.5/BZ6 BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 3.3 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ6 BZ5
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
ARAGON 114 E 2.75 0.98 0.81 0.17
ARAGON 124 E 1.99 0.93 0.77 0.16
ARAGON 128 E 1.27 0.98 0.81 0.17
ARAGON 135 E 1.00 0.98 0.81 0.17
ARAGON 149 E 0.78 0.96 0.79 0.17
ARAGON 154 E 0.78 0.93 0.77 0.16
ARAGON 180 E 0.60 0.88 0.73 0.15
ARAGON 128 S E 1.19 0.92 0.87 0.05
ARAGON 135 S E 0.94 0.92 0.87 0.05
ARAGON 149 S E 0.73 0.90 0.85 0.05
ARAGON 154 S E 0.73 0.87 0.82 0.05
ARAGON 180 S E 0.56 0.83 0.79 0.04
ARAGON 214 E 1.45 0.93 0.78 0.15
ARAGON 224 E 1.05 0.88 0.74 0.14
ARAGON 228 E 0.67 0.93 0.78 0.15
ARAGON 235 E 0.53 0.93 0.78 0.15
ARAGON 249 E 0.41 0.91 0.76 0.15
ARAGON 254 E 0.41 0.88 0.74 0.14
291
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires ARAGON
with polycarbonate diffuser
Optical system
Diffuser made of clear,
impact-resistant and UV-sta-
bilised polycarbonate with
stylish, fine-grained front
planes, smooth exterior fin-
ish, with internal channel
prisms. Diffuser made in one
piece, mechanically stable.
Safe retention of the diffuser
by means of inter-lock pairs
closed without tools.
S With highly-specular
reflector, reflection-intensi-
fied, for symmetrical light
distribution.
SA With highly-specular
reflector, reflection-intensi-
fied, for asymmetrical light
distribution.
Luminaire body
Polycarbonate, recyclable,
very low inflammability, light-
grey. With upper- and front-
plane perforations for mains
supply and further wiring as
well as for through-wiring by
means of heat-resistant
internal wiring. Grommets
are enclosed loose. Internal
wiring to be ordered sepa-
rately.
Mounting by means of en-
closed stainless steel fixing
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
clamps. With stainless steel No. 2913
wire bracket for steel strip DIN 5040: B20
suspension or for chain su- CIBSE BZ:
spension to be provided by BZ6
the contractor. NBN L 14-002:
BZ7/2/BZ6
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts.
Luminaires can also be sup-
plied with electronic control
gear, reference suffix E,
e.g. ARAGON 158 E.
292
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
ARAGON 218 2x18 390 2.9 ARAGON 136 S 1x36 800 235 475 4.3
ARAGON 236 2x36 800 235 475 4.8 ARAGON 158 S 1x58 1100 235 475 4.6
ARAGON 258 2x58 1100 235 475 5.2 ARAGON 136 SA 1x36 800 235 475 4.3
ARAGON 158 SA 1x58 1100 235 475 4.6
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 66
293
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires
with PLEXIGLAS diffuser
S With highly-specular,
anodised reflector.
Luminaire body
Glass-fibre reinforced poly-
ester resin, very low inflam-
mability, light-grey. 7171
with internal reflector made
of polyester resin, very low
inflammability, white. /36
and /58 with front-plane,
self-sealing openings for
through-wiring inside the
luminaire. Projections and
indentations in the front
planes ensure precise align-
ment of the luminaires in the
continuous line.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. /15, /18
with 2-pole, /36, /58
with 4-pole connection termi-
nal for wires up to 2.5 mm2
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
and additional earth connec- No. 2110 No. 2110
tion terminal. With low-loss DIN 5040: B21 DIN 5040: B31
ballasts. 7171 in safety CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
class II, without earth con- BZ6 BZ6
nection terminal. NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ6 BZ6
294
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 kg
W mm W mm
7131 P/36 1x36 900 195 390 400 3.9 7132 P/36 2x36 900 195 390 400 7.0
7131 P/58 1x58 1200 195 390 550 5.2 7132 P/58 2x58 1200 195 390 550 9.4
7132 PS/1x58 1x58 1200 195 390 550 8.3
7132 P/TC11 2xTC-S11 215 25 2.1
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 54
7171 Safety class II
295
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires
with PLEXIGLAS or polycarbonate diffuser
Application
Damp or corrosive environ-
ments and covered exterior
areas. 1715NPC also
recommended for areas with
increased requirements as
to mechanical stability.
Optical system
Trapezium-shaped
PLEXIGLAS diffuser, smooth
external finish, with internal
prisms, made in one piece,
mechanically stable and tor-
sionally rigid. Safe retention
of the diffuser by means of
rocker fasteners made of
glass-fibre reinforced poly-
amide.
PC V2A
Polycarbonate diffuser,
impact-resistant, smooth
exterior surface, with internal
prisms, made in one piece,
mechanically stable and tor-
sionally rigid. Safe retention
of the diffuser by means of
V2A stainless steel rocker
fasteners.
Luminaire body
Glass-fibre reinforced poly-
ester resin, very low inflam-
mability, light-grey. Gear tray
can be removed without
using tools and hung from
the luminaire body for main-
tenance purposes. Double
front-plane feeding possibili-
ty for mains supply and fur-
ther wiring as well as for
heat-resistant through-wir-
ing. Additional ceiling-orien-
ted feeding possibilities.
2 grommets are enclosed
loose.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 2-pole
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2 and additional
earth connection terminal.
With low-loss ballasts.
296
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
1715N/118 1x18 310 178 356 1.8 1715N/218 2x18 310 178 356 2.2
1715N/136 1x36 840 218 436 2.6 1715N/236 2x36 840 218 436 3.3
1715N/136 PC V2A 1x36 840 218 436 2.6 1715N/236 PC V2A 2x36 840 218 436 3.3
1715N/158 1x58 1140 218 436 4.3 1715N/258 2x58 1140 218 436 5.8
1715N/158 PC V2A 1x58 1140 218 436 4.3 1715N/258 PC V2A 2x58 1140 218 436 5.8
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 65
297
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires
Luminaire body
Glass-fibre reinforced poly-
ester resin, very low inflam-
mability, light-grey. With
front-plane feeding and
grommets for mains supply.
Further wiring, central feed-
ing or continuous-line
arrangements by means of
internal wiring accessory
07191/4LV/.
FF E
For production sites
exposed to fire hazards
caused by dust and fibrous
substance. Identical with
7191, 7192, but with
impact-resistant lamp pro-
tection tubes and equipped
as standard with electronic
control gear (E) because of
higher thermal safety
requirements.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 2-pole
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2. With low-loss
ballasts.
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Luminaires can also be sup- No. 2111 No. 2111
plied with electronic control DIN 5040: B21 DIN 5040: A30
gear, reference suffix E, CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
e.g. 7191/36 E. Versions BZ6/1.25/BZ5 BZ6/1.25/BZ5
FF E with electronic control NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ6/1.5/BZ5 BZ6/1.5/BZ5
gear and additional earth
connection terminal as
standard.
Reflectors (accessories)
1 piece, solvent-free pow-
der-coated sheet steel,
white. Universally suitable for
single- and twin-lamp ver-
sions.
07190 R/18 for 719/18.
07190 R/36 for 719/36.
07190 R/58 for 719/58.
298
Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 E3 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 E3 kg
Luminaire + refl.* W mm Luminaire + refl.* W mm
7191/18 7192/18
+ 07190 R/18 1x18 400 130 89 200 200 2.0 + 07190 R/18 2x18 400 130 89 200 200 2.6
7191/36 7192/36
+ 07190 R/36 1x36 800 233 189 440 360 3.1 + 07190 R/36 2x36 800 233 189 440 360 4.0
7191/36 FF E 7192/36 FF E
+ 07190 R/36 1x36 800 233 189 440 360 2.7 + 07190 R/36 2x36 800 233 189 440 360 3.0
7191/58 7192/58
+ 07190 R/58 1x58 1100 233 189 590 510 4.0 + 07190 R/58 2x58 1100 233 189 590 510 5.4
7191/58 FF E 7192/58 FF E
+ 07190 R/58 1x58 1100 233 189 590 510 3.2 + 07190 R/58 2x58 1100 233 189 590 510 3.5
* Reflector to be ordered separately. * Reflector to be ordered separately.
652dM+o
Degree of protection IP 65
719E Safety class I
1 pair, 1 m long, stainless steel V2A, with luminaire fixing 719FF E series luminaires are equipped as standard with Technical information see page 440.
brackets, complete for 719 luminaires. electronic control gear (E) and a lamp protection tube made
of impact-resistant polycarbonate. Particularly suitable for
areas exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous
substance.
299
Trunking 190 VZ
for damp or corrosive environments
195 VZ
193N 194N 197 VZ
Trunking 190 VZ
for weather-proof surface-
mounted luminaires. Made
of sheet steel, galvanised, 191 VZ 190 B/58 192 VZ
particularly torsionally rigid.
Upper side with dovetailed
profile for positioning of su- Ceiling-fixing claw 193N Steel strip suspension Luminaire support
spensions at will. For sheathed 1 piece, made of stainless 194N brackets 195 VZ
cable up to 12 mm, front- steel V2A, spacing between 1 piece, 1 m long, made of 1 pair, made of galvanised
plane cable introduction. trunking and fixing surface stainless steel V2A, including steel. For safe and sealed
15 mm. fixing claw. luminaire fixing.
190 VZ/II/58 2 lengths,
3148 mm long. Trunking coupling 191 VZ Blanking cover 190 B/58 Cable holders 197 VZ
190 VZ/III/58 3 lengths, 1 piece, made of galvanised 1 piece, plastic profile, 6 pieces, bright galvanised,
4722 mm long. steel, particularly stable, for light-grey, 1570 mm long, for sheathed cable
precisely aligned continuous snapped into place without 12 mm. For cable feeding
lines. tools, to be shortened on in trunkings 190 VZ/.
site.
End caps 192 VZ
1 pair, plastic, light-grey.
One pair of end caps is
required for each continuous
line.
300
Trunking 190
for hostile atmospheres
301
CENTA-S
Circular weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires
with opal polycarbonate diffuser
Optical system
Opal diffuser made of
impact-resistant polycarbon-
ate with stylish, fine-grained,
matt surface. Circular diffu-
ser in spherical form, partic-
ularly stable. Safe retention
of the diffuser by means of
internal spring clips.
Luminaire body
Polycarbonate, white. Suita-
ble for mounting to ceiling
and walls. With two plug-in
nipples for mains supply and
further wiring. With integra-
ted ventilation valve at the
rear, for safe pressure com-
pensation in case of temper-
ature fluctuations. Versions
for compact fluorescent
lamps TC-L equipped with
lampholders made of stain-
less steel.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts.
302
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
7482 PC/1xTR22 E 1xTR22 134 51 32 28 0.9 7483 PC/1xTR40 E 1xTR40 169 85 100 83 28 1.9
7482 PC/TCL18 2xTC-L18 134 51 32 28 1.7 7483 PC/2xTCL24 2xTC-L24 169 85 100 130 28 3.0
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 65
303
Weather-proof TRILUX weather-proof
recessed luminaires can
recessed be mounted in almost all
common ceiling systems.
luminaires In addition to square and
rectangular luminaires the
product group also includes
circular downlights in IP 54.
Page 308
Page 306
304
720T, 721T 722, 723 2911 4401 Clean-room
The series supports mini- A clear, chemically-resistant 2911 series downlights The IP 54 series 4401 is luminaires
mised energy consumption safety glass cover protects achieve the degree of pro- specially conceived for The catalogue
because the nearly low-loss the lamps and the optical tection IP 54 when com- integration in strip ceilings Lighting systems for
forward light diffusion of system of this series. Wide- bined with covers in clear or in module 100, strip width operating theatres
the diffuser material causes angle specular reflectors or Fresnel version. The closed 84 mm and a gap width of and clean-room envi-
high working efficiencies. parabolic louvres suitable for luminaire body offers protec- 16 mm. Detailed description ronments features
The diffuser surfaces with a DSE usage are optionally tion against the ingression can be found in the section luminaires for hospi-
smooth external finish are available. of dust and humidity towards Recessed diffuser lumi- tals and clean-room
easy to clean. the ceiling void. naires. production sites.
Catalogue available
Page 310 Page 312 Page 316 Page 284 upon request.
305
Weather-proof recessed luminaires
with prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
for cut-out recess openings
Optical system
PLEXIGLAS diffuser with pho-
tometrically effective prisms
to direct the light primarily
onto the working plane, par-
ticularly stable, diffuser fits
flush in the luminaire body
and is safely retained by
internal spring clips. A tool
for simple removal of the dif-
fuser is sent with each lumi-
naire.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. The sur-
rounding rim covers the saw
cut. Durable sealing of ceil-
ing void against dust and
moisture by surrounding seal
in luminaire rim, in ageing-
resistant foam rubber.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. /TC with
3-pole, others with 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts. Mains supply and fur-
ther wiring by means of two
grommets.
306
Reference Lamps Recess kg Reference Lamps Recess kg
W opening/mm W opening/mm
7392 P/TC11 2xTC-S11 304x304 2.9 7393 P/TC24 3xTC-L24 404x404 5.9
7392 P/TC18 2xTC-L18 304x304 3.0
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 54
307
Weather-proof recessed luminaires
with prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Optical system
PLEXIGLAS diffuser with pho-
tometrically effective prisms
to direct the light primarily
onto the working plane, par-
ticularly stable, diffuser fits
flush in the luminaire body
and is safely retained by
internal spring clips. A tool
for simple removal of the dif-
fuser is sent with each lumi-
naire.
S With highly-specular,
anodised reflector.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, with 4
swivel brackets for luminaire
fixing. Durable sealing of
ceiling void against dust and
moisture by surrounding seal
in luminaire rim, in ageing-
resistant foam rubber.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
lasts. Mains supply and fur- No. 2115 No. 2115
ther wiring by means of two DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
grommets. CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.25/BZ3 BZ2/0.75/BZ3
Luminaires can also be sup- NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ3/1.5/BZ4
plied with electronic control
gear, reference suffix E,
e.g. 7202 P/36 E.
308
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm
7204 P/3x18 3x18 625 603x603 7.0
7214 P/3x18 3x18 600 578x578 6.6
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 54
Universally suitable
for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids as well as for
ceilings with cut-out recess openings. These characteristics
of weather-proof luminaires enable recess mounting of the
72 series in almost all common ceiling systems. The gas-
ket in the surrounding luminaire rim ensures the sealing
towards surrounding ceiling grids or plates.
309
Recessed clean-room luminaires
with translucent PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Optical system
Translucent PLEXIGLAS dif-
fuser, allowing transmission
of more than 80 %. Easy-to-
clean smooth exterior sur-
face, particularly stable. Dif-
fuser fits flush in the lumi-
naire body and is safely
retained by internal spring
clips. A tool for simple
removal of the diffuser is
sent with each luminaire.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, with 4
swivel brackets for luminaire
fixing. Durable sealing of
ceiling void against dust and
moisture by surrounding seal
in luminaire rim, in ageing-
resistant foam rubber.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts. Mains supply and fur-
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
ther wiring by means of two No. 2116
grommets. DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ:
Luminaires can also be sup- BZ3/0.75/BZ4
plied with electronic control NBN L 14-002:
BZ4
gear, reference suffix E,
e.g. 7202 T/36 E.
310
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm
7204 T/3x18 3x18 625 603x603 7.0
7204 T/3xTC36 3xTC-L36 625 603x603 7.8
7214 T/3x18 3x18 600 578x578 6.6
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 54
311
Recessed clean-room luminaires
with specular reflector SB
Optical system
Luminaire cover made of
highly-resistant toughened
safety glass with white-coat-
ed aluminium frame. Resist-
ant to disinfectants and
intensive UV radiation. Inter-
nal spring-tensioned contact
clips automatically provide
earth continuity.
SB
With highly-specular, an-
odised reflectors for wide-
angle light distribution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, with 4
swivel brackets for luminaire
fixing. Durable sealing of
ceiling void against dust and
moisture by surrounding seal
in luminaire rim, in ageing-
resistant foam rubber.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
plug-in connection terminal No. 2180
for wires up to 2.5 mm2, DIN 5040: A40
including earth connection CIBSE BZ:
terminal. With low-loss bal- BZ5/0.75/BZ4
lasts. Mains supply and fur- NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/4/BZ3
ther wiring by means of two
grommets.
312
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm
7224 W-SB/3x36 3x36 625 1226x603 19.5
7224 W-SB/3x58 3x58 625 1526x603 25.2
7234 W-SB/3x36 3x36 600 1176x578 18.5
652d
Degree of protection IP 65
313
Recessed clean-room luminaires
with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Optical system
Luminaire cover made of
highly-resistant toughened
safety glass with white-coat-
ed aluminium frame. Resist-
ant to disinfectants and
intensive UV radiation. Inter-
nal spring-tensioned contact
clips automatically provide
earth continuity.
4 x 18 W and 4 x 36 W ver-
sions are available upon
request.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, with 4
swivel brackets for luminaire
fixing. Durable sealing of
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
ceiling void against dust and No. 2179 No. 2179
moisture by surrounding seal DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
in luminaire rim, in ageing- CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
resistant foam rubber. BZ2 BZ2
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/1.25/BZ1 BZ2
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 3-pole
(/3x18) or 5-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, including
earth connection terminal.
With low-loss ballasts. Mains
supply and further wiring by
means of two grommets.
314
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening mm
7224 W-RPV/3x36 3x36 625 1226x603 20.1
7224 W-RPV/3x58 3x58 625 1526x603 26.0
7234 W-RPV/3x36 3x36 600 1176x578 19.1
652d
Degree of protection IP 65
Vacuum plug 40
The vacuum plug facilitates easy
removal of the glass cover for
72 series luminaires.
315
Weather-proof downlights and covers
Application
2911 downlights in combi-
nation with covers 02901A
suitable for use in damp or
corrosive environments and
covered exterior areas.
Optical system
Highly-specular reflector, for
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. Reflector made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. With smooth
reflector.
B With facetted specular
reflector.
Luminaire body
Die-cast aluminium, with inte-
grated bezel ring. Shadow
gap between bezel ring and
reflector rim. Ceiling recess
mounting by means of inte-
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
grated swivel brackets.
Luminaire+covers* W opening/mm Luminaire+covers* W opening/mm
Electrical connection 2911/TCD18 2911/TCD18
Luminaires supplied ready + 02901 WA 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.0 + 02901 CA 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.0
for connection. With 5-pole 2911/TCT26 2911/TCT26
plug-in connection terminal + 02901 WA 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.0 + 02901 CA 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.0
and strain relief system for * Optical accessories to be ordered separately. * Optical accessories to be ordered separately.
mains supply and further wir-
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. Sealing and me-
chanical protection of the
cable by means of grom-
mets. With low-loss ballasts.
Optical accessory
1 piece, transparent float
glass, integrated in spherical
bezel ring, to be fixed with-
out tools in basic downlights
2911 to achieve IP 54
all-round. Safe retention by
means of spring catches.
02901 CA With chrome
decorative bezel ring.
02901 WA With white
decorative bezel ring.
316
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
Luminaire+covers* W opening/mm Luminaire+covers* W opening/mm
2911 B/TCD18 2911 B/TCD18
+ 02901 WA 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.0 + 02901 CA 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.0
2911 B/TCT26 2911 B/TCT26
+ 02901 WA 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.0 + 02901 CA 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.0 652d (o
* Optical accessories to be ordered separately. * Optical accessories to be ordered separately. Degree of protection IP 54
317
Weather-proof downlights and Fresnel lenses
Application
2911 downlights in combi-
nation with Fresnel lens
02901F suitable for use
in damp or corrosive envi-
ronments and covered exte-
rior areas.
Optical system
Highly-specular reflector
made of post-anodised
high-purity aluminium. With
smooth reflector.
B With facetted specular
reflector.
Luminaire body
Die-cast aluminium, with inte-
grated bezel ring. Shadow Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
gap between bezel ring and Luminaire+Fresnel lens* W opening/mm Luminaire+Fresnel lens* W opening/mm
reflector rim. Ceiling recess 2911/TCD18 2911/TCD18
mounting by means of inte- + 02901 W-FT 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5 + 02901 C-FT 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5
grated swivel brackets.
2911/TCT26 2911/TCT26
+ 02901 W-FT 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 + 02901 C-FT 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready 2911 B/TCD18 2911 B/TCD18
for connection. With 5-pole + 02901 W-FT 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5 + 02901 C-FT 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5
plug-in connection terminal 2911 B/TCT26 2911 B/TCT26
and strain relief system for + 02901 W-FT 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 + 02901 C-FT 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6
mains supply and further wir- * Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately. * Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately.
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. Sealing and me-
chanical protection of the
cable by means of grom-
mets. With low-loss ballasts.
318
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
Luminaire+Fresnel lens* W opening/mm Luminaire+Fresnel lens* W opening/mm
2911/TCD18 2911/TCD18
+ 02901 W-FS 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5 + 02901 C-FS 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5
2911/TCT26 2911/TCT26
+ 02901 W-FS 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 + 02901 C-FS 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6
2911 B/TCD18 2911 B/TCD18
+ 02901 W-FS 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5 + 02901 C-FS 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5
2911 B/TCT26 2911 B/TCT26
+ 02901 W-FS 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 + 02901 C-FS 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 652d (o
* Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately. * Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately. Degree of protection IP 54
tive accessories
and particularly
high-quality mate-
rials. Description
Sealed housing 02900/150 from page 16 on.
1 piece, sheet steel, fully galvanised, with two connection
openings 37 mm as well as four fixing brackets, to be
fixed on the panel with nails. Total height 150 mm. For
recess mounting of downlights 2911.
319
Sports hall Luminaires for sports halls
must be resistant to ball
luminaires impact. All TRILUX sports
hall luminaires are therefore
tested using our facilities
simulating ball impact.
Page 322/326
320
RST PSN WINLIGHT Q Floodlights LIGHTGATE
Post-anodised specular louvre Ball-impact-resistant pris- The compact industrial lumi- The catalogue Flood- Intelligent lighting
RST with graduated concave- matic cover, safely retained naires WINLIGHT Q for high- lights for sports and management
profiled cross blades for a in aluminium frame, creates pressure lamps embody a working facilities, reduces energy
narrow/wide-angle light dis- application-oriented, narrow/ lighting alternative to sys- traffic installations consumption in
tribution. Strengthening rods wide-angle light distributions, tems for fluorescent lamps. and accentuation sports halls thanks
cause higher mechanical effectively supported by Resistant to ball impact lighting contains to daylight-depend-
stability and prevent tennis internal, highly-specular when combined with covers. clearly arranged ent regulation and
balls from getting stuck in reflectors. Description in the section product information. presence detection.
the louvre cells. Industrial luminaires.
Catalogue available Catalogue available
upon request. upon request.
Page 322/326 Page 324/326 Page 422
321
Surface-mounted luminaires, resistant to ball impact,
with white louvre RWS or
specular cross-blade louvre RST
Optical system
Direct.
RWS
Louvre made of solvent-free
powder-coated sheet steel,
white, for a uniform light dis-
tribution.
RST
Specular louvre with gradu-
ated, concave-profiled cross
blades, made of post-anod-
ised aluminium, oxide film
thickness 8 m, no dis-
turbing iridescence phenom-
ena, insensitive to soiling,
long-time stable reflection
characteristics.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. With front-
plane knock-out openings
for heat-resistant through-
wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 4-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and
additional earth connection
terminal. /58 with low-loss
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
ballasts, /80 E with elec- T8 No. 2119 T8 No. 2119
tronic control gear (E). DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
Luminaires /58 can also BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5 BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5
be supplied with non-dim- NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ3
mable or /58, /80 lumi-
naires also with dimmable
electronic control gear, ref-
erence suffix E for non-
dimmable electronic control
gear or ED for dimmable
electronic control gear,
e.g. 5063 RST/80 ED.
Indications Page
Through-wiring set 328 T5 fluorescent lamps
Trunking 328 Increased lighting requirements for
Planning suggestions 329 many sports disciplines have to be
Emergency light 428 met according to the new standard
Lighting management EN 12193. In most of these cases T5
system 431 fluorescent lamps in lumen-rich version
Lamp characteristics 444 are recommended.
322
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg
W mm W mm
5062 RST/58 2x58 1200 174 150 349 600 75 12.3 5063 RST/58 3x58 1200 174 280 349 600 210 17.0
5062 RST/80 E 2x80 1200 174 150 349 600 75 10.4 5063 RST/80 E 3x80 1200 174 280 349 600 210 13.9
652de
Degree of protection IP 20
Luminaire alignment
Very good visual conditions are
achieved when sports hall luminaires
are turned around their longitudinal axis
in the direction of the court. These
turning angles can be easily realised
by means of angle sections.
323
Surface-mounted luminaires, resistant to ball impact,
with prismatic cover PSN
Application
Ball-impact-resistant lumi-
naires for sports halls, tennis
halls, squash halls and multi-
purpose halls.
Optical system
Direct.
PSN
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover
with photometrically effec-
tive prisms, retained in alu-
minium frame which can be
hung for maintenance pur-
poses. With highly-specular,
anodised reflectors for nar-
row/wide-angle light distri-
bution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. With front-
plane knock-out openings
for heat-resistant through-
wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 4-pole
plug-in connection terminal
for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and
additional earth connection
terminal. /58 with low-loss
ballasts, /80 E with elec-
tronic control gear (E).
Indications Page
Through-wiring set 328 T5 fluorescent lamps LIGHTGATE
Trunking 328 Increased lighting requirements for LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting manage-
Planning suggestions 329 many sports disciplines have to be ment system preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
Emergency light 428 met according to the new standard equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE
Lighting management EN 12193. In most of these cases T5 embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control
system 431 fluorescent lamps in lumen-rich version and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated pres-
Lamp characteristics 444 are recommended. ence detection, see page 431.
324
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg
W mm W mm
5062 PSN/58 2x58 1200 174 150 349 600 75 11.9 5063 PSN/58 3x58 1200 174 280 349 600 210 16.5
5062 PSN/80 E 2x80 1200 174 150 349 600 75 10.1 5063 PSN/80 E 3x80 1200 174 280 349 600 210 13.4
652de
Degree of protection IP 40
325
Recessed luminaires, resistant to ball impact,
with white louvre RWS, specular cross-blade louvre RST or
with prismatic cover PSN
Optical system
RWS
Louvre made of solvent-free
powder-coated sheet steel,
white, for a uniform light dis-
tribution.
RST
Specular louvre with gradu-
ated, concave-profiled cross
blades, made of post-anod-
ised aluminium, oxide film
thickness 8 m, no dis-
turbing iridescence phenom-
ena, insensitive to soiling,
long-time stable reflection
characteristics. Louvre re-
tention by means of spring-
tensioned clips providing
earth continuity. Louvre can
be lowered and hung from
either side without tools.
PSN
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover
with photometrically effec-
tive prisms, retained in alu-
minium frame which can be
hung for maintenance pur-
poses. With highly-specular,
anodised reflectors for nar-
row/wide-angle light distri-
bution.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. With front-
plane knock-out openings
for heat-resistant through-
wiring.
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2121 No. 2121
Electrical connection DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
Luminaires supplied ready CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
for connection. With 4-pole BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5 BZ1
plug-in connection terminal NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ2
for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and
additional earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts.
326
Reference Lamps Recess kg Reference Lamps Recess kg
W opening/mm W opening/mm
3663 RST/58 3x58 1540x428 16.4 3762 PSN/58 2x58 1540x291 11.4
3763 PSN/58 3x58 1540x428 16.3
652de
RWS, RST: Degree of protection IP 20
PSN: Degree of protection IP 40
327
Trunking 110N
for sports and tennis halls
Trunking
mounting
In sports or ten-
nis halls it is often not possi- 112
ble or not advisable to install
the surface luminaires directly
to the ceiling of the hall.
111
This is the case when a con-
tinuous mounting surface for 110N/155
continuous lines is not given 110N/310
because of ceiling joists or
sky lights or when a luminaire 113N
arrangement directed towards
the court offers photometric
advantages, especially in
tennis halls.
Through-wiring sets
Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual
wires 1.5 mm2.
3LV 3-conductor through-wiring
5LV 5-conductor through-wiring
328
Lighting of sports halls
Lighting class I:
Competitive level
High-performance competi-
Minimum requirements Horizontal illuminances, uni- Horizontal illuminances, uni- Horizontal illuminances, uni- Lighting class II:
for the lighting of formity and colour rendering formity and colour rendering formity and colour rendering Competitions on a medium
sports halls level such as regional or
local matches are generally
Eav 1)lx Emin/Eav1) Ra Eav1)lx Emin/Eav1) Ra Eav1)lx Emin/Eav1) Ra characterised by a medium
amount of visitors and
Badminton
medium visual distances.
Ice hockey/figure skating 2)
This class can also include
Fencing
750 0.7 60 500 0.7 60 300 0.7 20 high-performance training.
Hockey
Squash
Lighting class III:
Table tennis
Simple competitions such
Basketball as local or small associa-
Indoor soccer (small field) tions matches are generally
Weight-lifting played without public. This
Handball class also includes general
Judo, kendo, karate 750 0.7 60 500 0.7 60 200 0.5 20 training, general school and
Indoor cycle racing leisure sports.
Wrestling
School sports The requirements as to
Volleyball /fist ball horizontal illuminance, uni-
Aerobics/dancing formity and colour rendering,
Speed ice-scating described in the table oppo-
Climbing site, refer to sports disci-
Climbing (on a climbing wall) plines in indoor sports facili-
Track-and-field sports 500 0.7 60 300 0.6 60 200 0.5 20 ties without film or television
Horseback riding recording.
Sports gymnastics
Roller skating
Gymnastics
Tennis 3) 750 0.7 60 500 0.7 60 300 0.5 20
Archery
Bowling 200 0.5 60 200 0.5 60 200 0.5 60
Shooting
Boccie
Boule 300 0.7 60 200 0.7 60 200 0.5 20
Ptanque
Bowls (short course) 500 0.8 60 500 0.8 60 300 0.5 20 1)
In EN 12193 the medium illuminance is indi-
cated with Eav.
Boxing: ring 2000 0.8 80 1000 0.8 80 500 0.5 60
2)
training area 300 80 300 80 300 60 For light point height under 8 m Emin/Emax 0.5,
for class III also 0.5 is possible.
Curling: house 300 0.7 60 300 0.7 60 300 0.7 60
3)
No luminaires over the pitch and up to 3 m
rink 200 0.7 60 200 0.7 60 200 0.7 60 behind the base-line.
329
Planning examples for the
lighting of sports halls
halls (left table) or triple the longer sides of the hall. powder-coating.
sports halls (right table) Working plane: 0m RST
installation examples for the Reflect. values: 0.5/0.5/0.3 In the planning tables below, Post-anodised aluminium
illuminance levels 750 lx, Light loss factor: 0.8 w1 stands for the distance louvre for narrow/wide-angle
wb11 500 lx and 300 lx are listed Luminous flux (58 W) 5000 lm of the first continuous line to light distribution, insensitive
w b22
11/2 B
in the table below. Luminous flux (80 W) 6150 lm the nearest wall, w2 for the to soiling.
W
2
330
Multiple contact switching Lighting management LIGHTGATE controllers are Ball impact resistance Ball impact resistance test
Triple-lamp TRILUX sports Further possibilities for light- usually installed in subvisions Sports halls do not only Sports hall luminaires must
hall luminaires with low-loss ing control and regulation outside the luminaires. The require photometric but also be resistant to ball impact
ballasts and electronic control arise in combination with the sensors are also installed mechanical quality. Lumi- and are therefore tested
gear can be connected in energy-saving lighting man- outside the luminaires or naires for sports halls must using our facilities simulating
series. The lighting level e.g. agement system LIGHTGATE, in the sports hall ceiling in be resistant to ball impact. ball impact. After 36 shots
in 750 lx installations can see page 431. combination with ball impact with impact speeds of
thus be reduced to 500 lx. protection covers. A further This demand is met by all 54 km/h or around 35 mph
The system version requirement are dimmable TRILUX sports hall luminaires the luminaires must not
Twin-lamp luminaires can LIGHTGATE LG 31, which luminaires. All TRILUX sports mounted in or to solid ceil- show sign of severe damage
be connected in series in is adjustable to the three set hall luminaires are available ings or substructures as well or have lost luminaire com-
combination with inductive values 750 lx, 500 lx and with dimmable electronic as for suspended mounting ponents. Furthermore, while
ballasts. This is not possible 300 lx typical for sports halls, control gear, reference suffix using the appropriate trunk- lamp failure is permissible,
for standard twin-lamp lumi- saves energy by considering ED. ings 110N, see page 328. lamp fracture is naturally
naires with electronic control the sensored daylight com- prohibited.
gear because twin-lamp ponent. Further saving potential
electronic control gear is results from presence detec-
used. tion, another function of the
LIGHTGATE system.
331
Planning examples for the
lighting of tennis halls
Standard demands Luminaires for tennis halls The luminaires are arranged three luminaires at a light Planning parameters
EN 12193 defines the refer- Due to the diameter of tennis parallel to the ceiling, tilted point height of 5.0 m with a The calculations are based
ence area for indoor tennis balls at 63.5 to 66 mm, at angle = 30 to the distance of approx. 3.40 m on the following assumptions:
as an area with the dimen- the spacing between cross court. to the base-line.
sions 36 m x 18 m for each blades of louvre luminaires Working plane: 0m
court. For the lighting class- for tennis halls has to be A uniform light distribution Reflect. values: 0.5/0.5/0.3
es I /II /III, illuminance levels appropriately reduced, this across the playing area is Light loss factor: 0.8
of 750 lx/500 lx/ 300 lx being 60 mm maximum in achieved by arranging two or
with a uniformity of 0.7 the case of TRILUX louvre
(class I, II) or 0.5 (class III) luminaires for sports halls. S
are required there. This means that all TRILUX
louvre luminaires for sports
Arrangement halls can be used for tennis
Luminaires in tennis halls halls.
5,0
must be arranged as conti-
nuous lines, both parallel to Planning examples
the side lines (outside of The planning examples below
H1
the court) as well as parallel were developed for halls with
to the ceiling, for adequate two courts. The indicated
lighting of balls that are photometric values can be 3,2
3,2
Tennis halls
with 2 courts L x W: 36.6 x 36.6 m 1) Planning results
Louvre version/ Lamp Reference
luminaire cover type 750 lx 500 lx 300 lx
No. of luminaires 8 x 8 + 4 x 2 = 72
T8 5062 RWS/58
332
Indoor sports disciplines with
special lighting requirements
8
Ice hockey Weather-proof luminaires for fluorescent
Ice figure skating lamps are recommended for halls with
Speed ice-skating ceiling heights of up to approx. 7 m.
Roller-skating TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and
OPTILUX, see catalogue 99/12.
286 11 15
Gymnastics Sports hall luminaires resistant to ball
impact, see page 320.
152 260
Indoor cycling TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and
OPTILUX, see catalogue 99/12.
11 15
Horseback riding In case of ammonia atmospheres, please
contact your local TRILUX support centre.
TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and
OPTILUX, see catalogue 99/12.
286 11 15
Schwimming Increased number of lamps/luminaires
might be necessary in the diving area. In
case of corrosive atmospheres, please
contact your local TRILUX support centre.
286 284 422
Numbers in the illustrations refer to the corresponding pages in the catalogue or in brochures.
333
Continuous-line luminaires, TRILUX industrial systems
and individual luminaires
batten luminaires, characterised by rapid and
easy installation create the
WINLIGHT Q best conditions for demand-
oriented, economic lighting.
Depending on the equipment
level, these luminaires are
suitable for use in different
areas such as simple stor-
age facilities, high halls or
for precision mounting with
sophisticated visual tasks. DELTA
The rapid-mounting continu-
ous-line system DELTA for
T5 and T8 lamps is based
on reflector profiles with
integrated trunking function.
DELTA is also predestined
for architecture-oriented
applications thanks to its
modern design concept.
Page 336
334
E-LINE 796 1615, 6141 WINLIGHT Q Floodlights
The modular rapid-mounting The solid, rapid-mounting Individual batten luminaires High lumen packages char- TRILUX offers a comprehen-
continuous-line system con- continuous-line system 796 are used in areas with acterise 798 industrial sive range of floodlights
sists of individual compo- with covers in chemically- uncomplicated visual tasks. luminaires. Recommended for sports and working
nents suitable for function- resistant silicate glass is Battens can be arranged as for the lighting of higher facilities, traffic installations
and task-oriented combina- predestined for workplaces totally conform reflector lumi- halls and covered exterior and accentuation lighting.
tion. Four different reflector with an increased degree of naires by means of optionally areas. Symmetrical or Detailed planning and prod-
types and versatile optical pollution. 3-lamp versions available accessories. asymmetrical optics enable uct information are featured
accessories offer an exten- with specular reflectors are demand-oriented lighting. in the corresponding cata-
sive planning scope. available for increased light logues which are available
requirements. upon request.
335
The concept for an attractive continuous-line design
Design perspectives
DELTA embodies a futuristic
construction principle within
the sector of rapid-mounting
continuous-line systems:
cross-section-optimised,
extremely stable base units
specially conceived for T5
fluorescent lamps with a
diameter of only 16 mm
form a unit taking over the
function of conventional
trunkings and reflectors.
This construction principle
creates the conditions for a
modern design concept.
DELTA variety
DELTA is available in three
basic versions: versions with
reflectors for direct light
distribution and those with a
decorative indirect compo-
nent cover the whole appli-
cation range of conventional
continuous-line systems.
These systems optionally
equipped with louvres can
also be used as continuous
Uniform reflector cross-section lines or geometrical arrange-
All gear trays of the DELTA range are inserted into a uniform ments in architecture-oriented
base profile. The slender design of the lighting installation is areas. Rooms with increased
thus always assured, independent of the photometrical risk of pollution are however
demands. For example, if different illuminances are required predestined applications for
in various zones and the installation must, in consequence, DELTA base units with silicate
include single-lamp and twin-lamp gear trays. glass covers.
336
337
DELTA
a truly rapid-mounting continuous-line system
Continuous-line length/m
0 1.54
338
max. 4.50 m
2nd suspension point
3.07 4.60
339
DELTA equipment variety for optimised lighting planning
and flexibility towards future lighting requirements
Production hall
DELTA for optimised DELTA flexible when it
plannings comes to future lighting
Lighting plannings including requirements
continuous-line systems are Today, variable use of rooms
not routinely solved. From is not only typical for pro-
time to time room geometries duction sites where certain
and illuminance requirements areas are used varyingly as
can change considerably. warehouse, transport zone m
.48
This calls for varied plannings. or production area with the 47
most different visual tasks.
A lighting system with todays The same goes for handicraft
required deployment can enterprises, schools and
only meet the respective sales areas.
individual case if situation-
oriented lumen packages are DELTA embodies a flexible
available. lighting system allowing a
wide range of utilisation
DELTA offers this desirable changes since complicated
variety in form of single- reinstallations are not neces-
and twin-lamp gear trays for sary. The tool-free exchange
tried-and-tested T8 lamps of gear trays allows illumi- 0m
as well as for innovative nance values to be adapted 2.5
m
T5 lamps in efficient and to the current visual tasks .0
10
lumen-rich versions. The without further installation
spectrum of corresponding work. m
lumen packages ranges in .0
10
six levels from 3 300 lm up to 0m
12 300 lm. 2.5
Planning data
Production hall Length x width x height m 50 x 25 x 7
Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 50/50/20
Height of the working plane m 0.85
Height of the luminaire plane m 6.00
Light loss factor v 0.80
Lighting requirements
DELTA base profiles can be optionally equipped with one of e.g. precision mounting Nominal illuminance lx 500
six gear trays. Solution
Conversion to gear tray 2 x 80 W Reference 7602N/80 E
Lamp Luminous flux Calculation result Illuminance lx 568
1 x 58 W/T8/ 26 mm 5 000 lm Uniformity g1 0.67
2 x 58 W/T8/ 26 mm 10 000 lm
1 x 35 W/T5/ 16 mm 3 300 lm
2 x 35 W/T5/ 16 mm 6 600 lm
1 x 80 W/T5/ 16 mm 6 150 lm
2 x 80 W/T5/ 16 mm 12 300 lm
340
Sales area Classroom
3.2
4m
0 m 7m
8.3 7.6
3
0m
3.0 5m
m 1.1
5 .50 0m
0 m 2.4
5.5 0m
0m 2.4
5.5 5m
0 m 1.1
5.5
0m
3.0
5 x 7 gear trays 2 x 58 W Reference 7602N/58 E special study zone Nominal illuminance lx 500
5 x 7 lamella louvres RW Reference 07600 RW/1500 Solution
Calculation result Illuminance lx 514 Conversion to gear tray 2 x 35 W Reference 7602N/35 E
Uniformity g1 0.89 Calculation result* Illuminance lx 581
* in combination with cashier lighting Uniformity g1 0.71
* in combination with blackboard lighting
341
Combinations of base units
and optical accessories
Direct for IP 20
Direct/indirect for IP 20
Direct for IP 50
Direct IP 20
Base units with integrated
direct reflectors in IP 20
offer versatility because they
can be combined with all
optical accessories. Page 350
Direct/indirect IP 20
Base units in IP 20 with inte-
grated perforated reflectors
provide an indirect compo-
nent of around 6 %. This
enhances the style of the
luminaires and creates an
appealing room atmosphere. Page 352
Direct IP 50
Special base units in IP 50
offer effective protection of
the optical systems against
soiling, thanks to integrated
silicate glass covers. Page 362
342
Combination versatility Standard equipment with
The matrix below shows the electronic control gear
compatibility of DELTA base Electronic control gear
units with different optical embodies cost-minimised
accessories. operation efficiency and eco-
logical benefits. In addition to
The pages indicated relate typical comfort advantages,
to the following application the considerable increase
pages 350 to 363, featuring of the lamp life as opposed
the characteristics of the to operation with inductive
respective components, ballasts stands out as well.
their dimensions and the
resulting photometrics as DELTA gear trays are
well as product and applica- equipped as standard with
tion illustrations. electronic control gear.
Versions with dimmable
electronic control gear are
available as well, reference
suffix ED.
Optical accessories
see pages 350-363
Page 350 Page 354 Page 354 Page 356 Page 356 Page 358 Page 360
Page 352
Page 362
343
DELTA
Base units
344
Reference Length IP kg
for individual luminaires mm
07610 E/1500 1538 50 5.9
for continuous lines
07610/II/5LV/1500 3062 50 11.8
07610/III/5LV/1500 4593 50 17.7
07610/II/7LV/1500 3062 50 12.0
07610/III/7LV/1500 4593 50 17.9
Base units can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays,
both in single-lamp and twin-lamp version.
Gear trays to be ordered separately.
End caps and connectors IP 50 Blanking cover Feeding accessory 07600 ESB
Safely fixed end caps in impact-resistant, PCV-free and 07600 B/1500 1 piece, necessary for the entry of
UV-stabilised ABS complete DELTA base units in accordance 1 piece, for base units cables at the upper plane of the
with the degree of protection (here IP 50), either for individual 07600 and 07610, base units 07600 and 07610.
luminaires or at the ends of continuous lines. sheet steel, white.
345
Node
90 - 270
A 03 D
07600 KA/7LV
07600 KA-RPV/7LV
110 110
75 75
3062
3212
110 110
75 75
4593
4743
07600 KA/7LV
For continuous lines in IP 20
(not in combination with
louvres RPV).
07600 KA-RPV/7LV
For continuous lines in combi-
nation with parabolic louvres
RPV in IP 20.
346
Wire and chain suspensions
A 01 DSD A 01 SD A 01 KD
A 01 DSD-IP50 A 01 SD-IP50 A 01 KD-IP50
E 03 SD E 03 KD
E 07 E 03 SD-IP50 E 03 KD-IP50
07600 MH E 01 E 06 E 04 E 05N
Mounting aid 07600 MH Ceiling fixing plate Decorative wire Wire suspension Chain suspension
1 pair, suspension aid for E 01 suspension 1 piece, consisting of steel 1 piece, consisting of link
mounting of continuous 1 piece, sheet steel, gal- 1 piece, consisting of steel wire, galvanised, 1.75 mm, chain, galvanised, 1500 mm
lines. Recommended for vanised, with safety spring wire, galvanised, 1.75 mm, 1500 mm long, and suspen- long, with turnbuckle and
mounting of suspensions at hook to attach chains or 1500 mm long, and suspen- sion clamp. Wire length fully suspension clamp.
the joints of base units. wires without tools. sion clamp. Wire length fully adjustable without tools. A 01 KD for IP 20
Handling is described on adjustable without tools. A 01 SD for IP 20 A 01 KD-IP50 for IP 50.
page 367. A 01 DSD for IP 20. A 01 SD-IP50 for IP 50.
A 01 DSD-IP50 for IP 50. Suspension clamp
For safety reasons, fixing Suspension clamp 1 piece, for chain suspen-
accessories must be able Wire accessory E 07 1 piece, for wire suspensions sions, stainless steel, to be
to support five times the to realise wire suspensions in combination with acces- attached to the base unit
weight of the luminaires to on site, with steel wire E 06 sories E 06 and E 07. Stain- without tools.
be mounted on them. In and suspension clamps less steel, to be attached to E 03 KD for IP 20
case the maximum fixing E 03 SD. Wire accessory the base units without tools. E 03 KD-IP50 for IP 50.
spacings are retained this consisting of 12 grommets Wire length fully adjustable
results in loads of 30 kg as wire protection in the without tools. Turnbuckle E 05N
maximum per suspension suspension area, together E 03 SD for IP 20 1 piece, for height compen-
point. All suspension acces- with 12 pressure clamps to E 03 SD-IP50 for IP 50. sation in chain link length as
sories in the DELTA range make suspension eyelets with well as a chain-quick-action
are therefore designed for at pliers, recess size 10 mm. Link chain E 04 lock.
least 150 kg weight load. 20 m, galvanised, to be
Fixing accessories provided Steel wire E 06 shortened on site.
on site such as dowels, ceil- 20 m, 1.75 mm, gal-
ing hooks, etc. must meet vanised, with quick-acting
with these requirements. glue to seal the wire ends
from splicing when short-
ened. Only to be used in
combination with accessory
E 07.
347
DELTA
Gear trays for T8 fluorescent lamps 26 mm
direct or asymmetrical
Gear tray Reference Lamps Ballast System kg Reference Lamps Ballast System kg
Sheet steel, white. Fixed to Gear tray T8 rating Gear tray T8 rating
the base unit without tools 7601N/58 E 1x58W E 55W 1.7 7601N A/58 E 1x58W E 55W 1.7
by means of plastic-coated, 7602N/58 E 2x58W E 110W 1.8 For asymmetrical light distribution please combine with asymmetri-
metal turn-lock fasteners. Base units (see page 344) can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear cal specular reflector 07601 SA/1500.
trays, both in single- and twin-lamp version.
Production sites exposed
to fire hazards
Base units in IP 50 in combi-
nation with gear trays with
switchable or dimmable elec-
tronic control gear shine out
thanks to limited surface
temperatures and are la-
belled D. They are there-
fore predestined for use in
production sites exposed to
fire hazards caused by dust
and fibrous substance.
Electrical connection
Electrical connection is
made automatically when the
gear tray is attached to the
base unit. Lamp circuit con-
nections can be set to each
phase conductor without
tools. With electronic control
gear (E).
348
DELTA
Gear trays for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
direct or asymmetrical
652do
Degree of protection IP 20, IP 50
T5
Equipment options
for 5-conductor (5LV) and
349
Applications for DELTA gear trays:
Base unit, direct
Base unit, direct, with lamella louvre RW or RW-G
Lamella louvre RW
Sheet steel, white. To be
used in base units 07600.
Safe retention and easy
manipulation by means of
snap fasteners.
122
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ:
BZ3
140
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5/1.25/BZ4
350
Reference Specification for degree Reference Specification for degree
of protection of protection
Base unit Base unit
07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lenghts IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Accessories Accessories
07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW IP 20 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G IP 20
07600 RK End cap IP 20 07600 RK End cap IP 20
Gear trays to be ordered separately. Gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40 1 Number of luminaires 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ3 BZ3 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
140
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 20 4.2 6.8 7.0 11 20 4.4 7.0 7.4 12
BZ4 BZ4 30 5.6 8.4 9.3 14 30 5.9 8.7 9.8 15
40 6.9 9.9 12 16 40 7.4 10 12 17
Area Area
50 8.4 12 14 20 50 9.0 12 15 21
A A
in m2 60 9.7 13 16 22 in m2 60 10 14 17 23
80 12 16 21 27 80 13 17 22 29
100 15 19 25 32 100 16 20 27 34
150 21 26 36 43 150 23 28 39 46
200 28 33 46 55 200 30 35 50 59
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.2 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
351
Applications for DELTA gear trays:
Base unit, direct/indirect
Base unit, direct/indirect, with lamella louvre RW or RW-G
Lamella louvre RW
Sheet steel, white. To be
used in base units 07600.
Safe retention and easy
manipulation by means of
snap fasteners.
122
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4
140
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5
Ordering example: continuous line (5 lengths) with Base units with indirect component
perforated base unit and lamella louvres RW Partial perforations at the lateral sur-
1 base unit 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 face of base units in G version create
1 base unit 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 a very decorative and comfortable
5 gear trays 7601N/35 E lighting atmosphere.
5 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500
Indications Page 2 end caps 07600 RK Due to their appealing design base
Photometric units with indirect component are rec-
combinations 342 Suspensions see page 347. ommended for areas where special
Base units demands are placed on the architec-
and accessories 344 tural aspect of a lighting installation.
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
352
Reference Specification for degree Reference Specification for degree
of protection of protection
Base unit Base unit
07600 G-E/1500 for indiv. luminaires, perforated IP 20 07600 G-E/1500 for indiv. luminaires, perforated IP 20
07600 G/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20
07600 G/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20 07600 G/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20
07600 G/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20
07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20 07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20
Accessories Accessories
07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW IP 20 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G IP 20
07600 RK End cap IP 20 07600 RK End cap IP 20
Gear trays to be ordered separately. Gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40 1 Number of luminaires 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ3/2/BZ4 BZ3/2/BZ4 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
140
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 20 4.4 7.2 7.4 12 20 4.8 7.6 8.0 13
BZ4/4/BZ5 BZ4/4/BZ5 30 5.9 8.9 9.9 15 30 6.4 9.4 11 16
40 7.4 10 12 17 40 8.1 11 14 19
Area Area
50 9.0 13 15 21 50 9.8 13 16 22
A A
in m2 60 10 14 17 23 in m2 60 11 15 19 25
80 13 17 22 29 80 15 19 24 31
100 16 20 27 34 100 18 22 29 37
150 23 28 38 46 150 25 30 42 50
200 30 35 50 59 200 33 39 55 64
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.2 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.2 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
353
Applications for DELTA gear trays:
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector S
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector S and
lamella louvre RW or RW-G
Application Reference Specification for degree
Production facilities, work- of protection
shops, assembly halls, Base unit
supermarkets, exhibition 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
halls, machine workstations 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
and precision assembly. 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Base unit
07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Unit composed of trunking
Accessories
and reflector, sheet steel,
galvanised, with white poly- 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S IP 20
ester coating. To be equip- 07600 RK End cap IP 20
ped with gear trays and opti- Gear trays to be ordered separately.
cal accessories, universally
suitable for single- and twin-
lamp gear trays for T5 and
T8 lamps. IP 20.
Specular reflector S
Made of reflection-intensified
aluminium with a surface
purity of 99.99 %, for nar-
row/wide-angle light distribu-
tion, for base units 07600,
07610 (not suitable for
base units 07600 G with
indirect component). For
emergency light versions
with gear trays 760+E14
special specular reflectors
07600 S/1500/E14 are to
C 0 - C 180 Data table
be ordered separately. No. 0626
122
DIN 5040: A50
Lamella louvre RW CIBSE BZ:
Sheet steel, white. To be BZ5/1.25/BZ4
140
used in base units 07600. NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/0.8/BZ3
Safe retention and easy
manipulation by means of
snap fasteners.
354
Reference Specification for degree Reference Specification for degree
of protection of protection
Base unit Base unit
07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Accessories Accessories
07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S IP 20 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S IP 20
07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW IP 20 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G IP 20
07600 RK End cap IP 20 07600 RK End cap IP 20
Gear trays to be ordered separately. Gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 1 Number of luminaires 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ2/0.75/BZ3 BZ2/0.75/BZ3 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
140
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 20 3.6 5.8 6.0 9.6 20 3.9 6.1 6.6 10
BZ3 BZ3 30 4.8 7.0 8.0 12 30 5.3 7.5 8.8 13
40 6.0 8.1 10 14 40 6.6 8.8 11 15
Area Area
50 7.4 10 12 17 50 8.1 11 14 18
A A
in m2 60 8.6 11 14 19 in m2 60 9.4 12 16 21
80 11 14 18 24 80 12 15 20 26
100 13 17 22 28 100 15 18 24 30
150 19 23 32 38 150 21 25 35 41
200 25 29 42 49 200 28 32 46 53
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
355
Applications for asymmetrical DELTA gear trays:
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector SA
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector SA and
lamella louvre RW or RW-G
Application Reference Specification for degree
Production facilities, work- of protection
shops, assembly halls, Base unit
supermarkets, exhibition 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
halls, sales areas and train- 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
ing rooms. 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Base unit
07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Unit composed of trunking
Accessories
and reflector, sheet steel,
galvanised, with white poly- 07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical IP 20
ester coating. To be equip- 07600 RK End cap IP 20
ped with gear trays and opti- Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately.
cal accessories, universally
suitable for single- and twin-
lamp gear trays for T5 and
T8 lamps. IP 20.
Specular reflector SA
Made of reflection-intensified
aluminium with a surface
purity of 99.99 %, for asym-
metrical light distribution,
for base units 07600,
07610 (not suitable for
base units 07600 G with
indirect component). Can
only be used in combination
with asymmetrical gear tray
7601N A.
C 0 - C 180 Data table
Lamella louvre RW No. 0631
Sheet steel, white. To be DIN 5040: A40
used in base units 07600. CIBSE BZ:
Safe retention and easy BZ3/0.75/BZ2/1/BZ3
manipulation by means of NBN L 14-002:
BZ4
snap fasteners.
700
650
600
550
2.70 m
Ordering example: continuous line (5 lengths) with Wall zone lighting with a continuous line
asymmetrical light distribution (2 lengths) illuminance distribution
1 base unit 07600/III/5LV/1500 (indications in lux)
1 base unit 07600/II/5LV/1500 Luminaire level height: 3.0 m
5 gear trays 7601N A/58 E Lower wall zone height: 0.9 m
5 specular reflectors, asymmetrical 07601 SA/1500 Distance to wall: 1.0 m
Indications Page 5 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500 Gear trays: 7601N A/58 E
Photometric 2 end caps 07600 RK Specular reflectors: 07601 SA/1500
combinations 342 Lamp luminous flux: 5200 lm
Base units Suspensions see page 347.
and accessories 344
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
356
Reference Specification for degree Reference Specification for degree
of protection of protection
Base unit Base unit
07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Accessories Accessories
07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical IP 20 07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical IP 20
07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW IP 20 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G IP 20
07600 RK End cap IP 20 07600 RK End cap IP 20
Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately. Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 0.7 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 0.8 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
357
Applications for DELTA gear trays:
Base unit, direct, with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application
Production facilities or work-
shops with CNC machines,
switchgear control rooms,
offices and rooms with DSE
workstations.
Base unit
Unit composed of trunking
and reflector, sheet steel,
galvanised, with white poly-
ester coating. To be equip-
ped with gear trays and opti-
cal accessories, universally
suitable for single- and twin-
lamp gear trays for T5 and
T8 lamps. IP 20.
Highly-specular parabolic
louvre RPV
Made of highly-specular
anodised aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.98 %,
luminance limited to
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60, thus corre-
sponding fully to LG 3,
Cat. II, in combination with
base units 07600 (not
suitable for base units
07600 G with indirect
component). Louvre reten-
tion by means of spring-ten-
sioned clips. Louvre can be
lowered and hung from ei-
ther side without tools.
358
Reference Specification for degree
of protection
Base unit
07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Accessories
07600 RPV/1500 Parabolic louvre RPV IP 20
07600 RK-RPV End cap IP 20
Gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
141
DIN5040: A50 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ2 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
NBN L 14-002: 140 20 3.5 5.6 5.8 9.4
BZ2 30 4.8 6.7 7.9 11
40 6.0 7.8 10 13
Area
50 7.4 9.6 12 16
A
in m2 60 8.6 11 14 18
80 11 14 19 23
100 14 16 23 27
150 20 22 33 37
200 26 29 43 49
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
359
Applications for DELTA gear trays:
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector HRL,
extremely narrow-angle light distribution
Application
High-bay warehouses, high
gangways and high halls.
Base unit
Unit composed of trunking
and reflector, sheet steel,
galvanised, with white poly-
ester coating. To be equipped
with gear trays and optical
accessories, universally sui-
table for T5 and T8 lamps.
IP 20.
Indications Page
Photometric
combinations 342
Base units
and accessories 344
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Emergency lighting 364
Planning 366
360
Reference Designation for degree
of protection
Base unit
07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Accessories
07601 HRL/1500 Specular reflector HRL for IP 20
single-lamp gear tray 7601N/
07600 RK End cap IP 20
Base units in combination with specular reflector HRL can only be equipped
with single-lamp T5 and T8 gear trays.
Gear tray to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
L 300 300
B/2
Light loss factor: v = 0.8 luminous intensity distribution
Point illuminance EP in lx
250
B=3m with high light output ratios,
Multiplication factors 200 200 allowing efficient realisation
for luminaire inserts B=6m of standard-conform illumi-
150
7601N/58 E: M = 1.34 h=6m nances even in case of ele-
7601N/80 E: M = 1.98 h
100 100 vated light point heights.
h = 14 m
h = 22 m
50 50
y 20 h = 30 m
x 0 0
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 0 1m 2m 3m
B/2 e
B Light point height Lat. distance x to
h in m gangway centre
361
Applications for DELTA gear trays:
Base unit IP 50, direct
Base unit IP 50, direct, with specular reflector S
Application
Workplaces with increased
degree of pollution. Also rec-
ommended in areas where
drilling emulsions are used
or oil gases are formed.
Base unit IP 50
Unit composed of trunking
and reflector, sheet steel,
galvanised, with white poly-
ester coating. To be equip-
ped with gear trays and opti-
cal accessories, universally
suitable for single- and twin-
lamp gear trays for T5 and
T8 lamps. Efficient protec-
tion against pollution in
accordance with IP 50 by
means of a silicate glass
cover retained by the con-
tinuous frame.
Specular reflector S
Made of reflection-intensified
aluminium with a surface
purity of 99.99 %, for nar-
row/wide-angle light distribu-
tion, for base units 07600,
07610 (not suitable for
base units 07600 G with
indirect component). For
emergency light versions
with gear trays 760+E14
special specular reflectors
07600 S/1500/E14 are to
be ordered separately.
362
Reference Specification for degree Reference Specification for degree
of protection of protection
Base unit Base unit
07610 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 50 07610 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 50
07610/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 50 07610/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 50
07610/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 50 07610/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 50
07610/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 50 07610/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 50
07610/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 50 07610/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths IP 50
Accessories Accessories
07610 RK End cap IP 50 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S IP 50
Gear trays to be ordered separately. 07610 RK End cap IP 50
Gear trays to be ordered separately.
652do
Degree of protection IP 50
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A50 1 Number of luminaires 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ2/2.5/BZ3 BZ2 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
NBN L 14-002: 140 NBN L 14-002: 20 5.2 8.3 8.6 14 20 4.7 7.1 7.8 12
BZ4/2/BZ3 BZ3 30 6.9 10 12 17 30 6.4 8.8 11 15
40 8.7 12 15 20 40 8.0 11 13 17
Area Area
50 11 14 18 24 50 9.8 13 16 22
A A
in m2 60 12 16 20 27 in m2 60 11 15 19 24
80 16 20 26 33 80 15 18 24 31
100 19 24 32 39 100 18 22 30 36
150 27 32 46 54 150 26 30 43 50
200 36 41 59 69 200 34 39 56 64
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
363
DELTA
Gear trays for safety lighting
Workplaces with min. 0.1Em3) max. 0.5 s Time of Single batteries Permanent
special risk min. 15 lx risk Specially safe- switching not
guarded mains necessary
1)
Central battery, group battery with or without inventor, rapid stand-by and
immediate stand-by power generator.
2)
... in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised.
3)
Em = Maintenance value of illuminance.
A B A 7601N/54 E + E 14
Emergency lighting takes over in the event of mains failure
8 10
8 10
Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx + 07600/ Base unit
of the general artificial lighting. It has to ensure that activities B 7601N/54 E + E 14
can be ended without risk and working facilities can be left
6
6
0.5 lx 0.5 lx + 07600 G/ Base unit, perforated
4
4
safely. Emergency lighting is divided into stand-by lighting C 7601N/54 E + E 14
+ 07600/ Base unit
2
and safety lighting. The safety lighting is further divided into 1 lx 1 lx + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
0
m
C 7601N/54 E + E 14
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10
Safety lighting for workplaces with special risks. + 07600 G/ Base unit, perforated
0
1 lx 1 lx
+ 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
2
10 8
Equipment options for Isolux curves The following luminous fluxes + E14 Gear tray
5-conductor and Illuminances achieved with are taken into account: Gear trays for continuous Sheet steel, white. Fixed to
7-conductor wiring DELTA gear trays for safety lines and individual lumi- the base unit by means of a
lighting are documented in Isolux curves + E14 naires with electronic control plastic-coated, metal turn-
Mains cable 3 con.
Mains cable 5 con.
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst.
EB single battery
UR switch. relay
E 14 socket
No. of conductors
Wiring type
the isolux curves opposite. Equipment: tubular incandes- gear and emergency light lock fastener without using
They refer to a level on the cent lamp, 40 W, luminous socket E14, red-marked. tools. With electronic control
floor and a light loss factor flux 380 lm. (Not suitable in combination gear.
of 0.8. Indirect portions are with extremely narrow-
not taken into consideration. Isolux curves + EB angle specular reflectors Electrical connection
Equipment: T5 fluorescent 07601 HRL/1500. Special The electrical connection with
lamps 35 W. Luminous flux version for narrow/wide- general and safety lighting
3 3 3300 lm (referred to nominal angle specular reflectors: circuit is made automatically
operation). The diagrams 07600 S/1500/E14.) when the gear tray is attached
3 1 4
opposite are based on bat- to the base unit. Lamp circuit
3 2 5 tery operation with corre- 7601 for 1 fluorescent connections can be set to
5LV
3 2 5 spondingly adjusted lumi- lamp 36 W or 54 W. the phase conductor without
3 2 5 nous flux. tools.
7602 for 2 fluorescent
5 5 Isolux curves + UR lamps 36 W or 54 W.
3 2 1 6 Equipment: T5 fluorescent
3 2 2 7 lamps 35 W, luminous flux With additional emergency
3300 lm. light socket E14 for tubular
3 2 2 7
incandescent lamps up to
5 1 6 7LV In case of different equip- 40 W, max. lamp length
5 2 7 ments the illuminance values 103 mm, max. diameter
5 2 7
must be multiplied by the 30 mm, as well as for com-
given factors. Deviating lumi- pact fluorescent lamps with
5 2 7 nous fluxes have to be con- integrated electronic control
sidered accordingly. gear. Max. lamp length
125 mm, max. diameter
42 mm.
364
Reference Nominal Lamps kg Reference Lamps kg
operating time W W
Gear trays with Gear trays with
single battery supply switching relay for
for permanent switching permanent switching
7601N/35 E + EB3 3 hours 1x35 2.7 7601N/35 E + UR 1x35 1.9
7601N/80 E + EB1 1 hour 1x80 2.5 7601N/80 E + UR 1x80 1.9
7601N/58 E + EB3 3 hours 1x58 2.7 7601N/58 E + UR 1x58 1.9
7602N/35 E + EB3 3 hours 2x35 3.1 7602N/35 E + UR 2x35 2.1
7602N/58 E + EB3 3 hours 2x58 3.0 7602N/58 E + UR 2x58 2.0
652do
Degree of protection IP 20, IP 50
A B A 7601N/35 E + EB A B A 7601N/35 E + UR
12 16
12 16
8 10
8 10
Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx + 07600/ Base unit Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx + 07600/ Base unit
B 7601N/35 E + EB B 7601N/35 E + UR
0.5 lx
6
C 7602N/35 E + EB C 7602N/35 E + UR
2
0
0
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 16 12 8 4 0 0 4 8 12 16
m
C 7602N/35 E + EB C 7602N/35 E + UR
m
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 16 12 8 4 0 0 4 8 12 16
+ 07600/ Base unit + 07600/ Base unit
0
0
0
1 lx 1 lx 1 lx 1 lx
+ 07600 RW/1500 White louvre + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
2
Multiplication factor for other equipments Multiplication factor for other equipments
4
12
10 8
10 8
+ EB1
Nominal operation time
1 hour.
+ EB3
Nominal operation time
3 hours.
365
Planning
235-1000
65-100
E E
E
Fixing above the joints Run Lamp Base unit Base unit Fixing
Opposite table contains length length 076/II/ 076/III/ points
information on the composi-
tion of DELTA continuous m No. Pieces Pieces No.
lines. The required number 3.07 2 1 2
of base units as well as the 4.61 3 1 2
minimum number of fixing 6.14 4 2 3
points for different continu- 7.67 5 1 1 3
ous line lengths is given, 9.20 6 2 3
assuming that the fixing 10.73 7 2 1 4
clamps of the suspen- 12.26 8 1 2 4
sions are directly placed 13.79 9 3 4
above the joints of the 15.32 10 2 2 5
base profiles. 16.85 11 1 3 5
18.38 12 4 5
All information for single- and 19.92 13 2 3 6
twin-lamp gear trays, inde- 21.45 14 1 4 6
pendent of the kind of opti- 22.98 15 5 6
cal equipment and the fixing 24.51 16 2 4 7
type. 26.04 17 1 5 7
27.57 18 6 7
Overhang dimensions 29.10 19 2 5 8
The overhang dimension at 30.63 20 1 6 8
the ends of continuous lines
must be min. 65 mm or
max. 1000 mm.
366
Mounting
1000 40 mm 40 1000 mm
2. Following the mechanical
connection of the base units
by means of solid interior
couplings, spacer brackets
are positioned at each joint.
3. Reflector connectors
avoid light leakage between
the base profiles.
367
E-LINE system components
Example with trunking, gear tray (IP 20), reflector and lamella louvre
1 Fixing accessories
2 Trunking
3 Trunking end cap
4 Male connector
5 Snap fastener
6 Gear tray
7 Reflector
8 Reflector end cap
9 Louvre
368
Reflectors T Reflectors R Reflectors RH Industrial self-suspended
Trapezium-shaped reflectors T Radial reflectors and an ex- With their elevated form, high reflectors F
are universally suitable for tensive range of accessories radial reflectors are designed Industrial self-suspended
both single-lamp and twin- such as louvres, specular primarily to house specular reflectors can directly be
lamp gear trays. They can reflectors and diffusers do louvres or DSE-suitable attached to the gear tray,
also be combined with white not only provide good light- parabolic louvres, but can without additional coverings,
lamella louvres. ing but also shine out thanks equally be equipped with thus providing a demand-
to their attractive design. white louvres or diffusers. oriented, cost-optimised
solution within the E-LINE
range.
369
E-LINE wiring options offering
increased planning scope
Individual luminaires,
prewired trunking
Gear trays, reflectors and optical acces-
sories can be combined to versatile indi-
vidual luminaires.
Modular system,
prewired trunkings
Continuous lines with modular luminaire
spacing are rapidly installed, saving both
time and money!
Modular system,
unwired trunking
Trunking wired on site allows continuous-
line installation with modular luminaire
spacing.
Variable system,
unwired trunking
Trunking wired on site allows continuous-
line installation with variable luminaire
spacing.
370
Single-length trunking
prewired
for individual luminaires
Trunking prewired
for modular system
Trunking unwired
for modular system for
through-wiring sets with
integrated connector sockets
in modular spacing or for
variable system for flatband
cables and connector sockets
to be located at will.
Continuous line 36 W or 58 W
with spacings to be chosen at
will. Trunking wired on site.
371
E-LINE
Combinations of reflectors
and optical accessories
Optical accessories
Lamella louvre Lamella louvre
T-RW RW
Self-suspended
reflector SAF
asymmetrical 07690 STF/58
07690 SAF/58 Page 406 Page 407
Self-suspended
reflector HRF
extremely
narrow-angle
372
Specular reflectors Prismatic diffuser Cross-blade louvre Parabolic louvre
SB wide-angle SA asymmetrical ST narrow-angle P RSV RMV semi-spec. RPV highly-spec.
07691 SB/58 07691 SA/58 07691 ST/58 07691 P/58 07691 RSV/58 07691 RMV/58 07691 RPV/58
07692 SB/58 07692 SA/58 07692 ST/58 07692 P/58 07692 RSV/58 07692 RMV/58 07692 RPV/58
Option
373
E-LINE basis:
Universal trunking for IP 20 and IP 50
Equipment options
for 5-conductor (5LV) and
7-conductor (7LV) wiring
Mains cable 5 cond.
Mains cable 3 cond.
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst.
EB single battery
UR switch. relay
E 14 socket
No. of conductors
Wiring type
3 3
3 1 4
3 2 5
5LV
3 2 5
3 2 5 Trunking 07690/I/58-7LV/E is the basis for individual lumi- Trunking 07690//5LV, 07690//7LV for non-interrupted
naires. It is equipped as standard with a 7-pole female con- continuous lines or continuous lines with blanking covers in
5 5 nector and a 7-conductor through-wiring set. Sockets and lamp length is prewired and equipped with a female connector
3 2 1 6 connectors protect the cable ends and allow for electrical per lamp length for tool-free electrical connection with the
3 2 2 7 connection as well as rapid connection with through-wiring gear tray.
sets of existing E-LINE continuous lines in case these are pro-
3 2 2 7
longated. 5-conductor through-wiring sets and 7-conductor through-
5 1 6 7LV wiring sets are optionally available for extended electrical
5 2 7 All E-LINE gear trays and reflectors as well as corresponding continuous-line equipment, see the table opposite.
5 2 7
optical accessories can be used for individual luminaires.
5 2 7 E-LINE individual luminaires are specially recommended for
applications such as individual lighting of workstations or light-
ing of small separated room zones.
374
Reference Length kg
Trunking unwired mm
07690/II/36-U 2460 2.4
07690/III/36-U 3690 3.6
07690/II/58-U 3060 3.0
07690/III/58-U 4590 4.5
Additional modules
07690/510/U 510 0.5
07690/1020/U 1020 1.0
IP 20
IP 50
IP 50 D
Trunking 07690/-U is the basis for the variable system for Blanking cover IP 20 Blanking cover IP 50
continuous lines with longitudinal luminaire spacings to be 1 piece, for trunking 07690. 07680 B/58
chosen at will. Connector sockets are connected on site with Plastic extrusion, white, to be easily 1 piece, for continuous lines in IP 50
auto-connect flatband cables. shortened on site. For IP 20. with trunking 07690.... Plastic extru-
07690 B/510 mm 510 mm long, sion, white, 1530 mm long.
Continuous lines can also be wired on site by means of 07690 B/1020 mm 1020 mm long,
5-conductor or 7-conductor through-wiring sets which are 07690 B/36 1230 mm long, Trunking connection gasket IP 50
equipped with connector sockets in a modular spacing of 07690 B/58 1530 mm long. 07680 KD
510 mm, 1230 mm or 1530 mm, allowing to realise rapidly 1 set, for continuous lines in IP 50.
corresponding modular blanking spacings or multiple spac- Cable holders IP 20 and IP 50 Interior, not visible from the outside.
ings. In case of wirings in 510 mm module additional trunking 07690 LHA Necessary for a durable and safe
sections may be necessary, see page 413. Through-wiring 1 piece, for trunking 07690. sealing of trunking joints. One set is
sets and wiring accessories see page 377. Stainless steel, for max. 4 sheathed required per joint.
cables 5 x 2.5 mm2, to be snapped
onto trunking without tools.
375
Through-wiring sets and accessories
for unwired E-LINE trunking units
Modular system with female connector spacings Modular system with female connector spacings
1230 mm or 1530 mm (1 lamp length) 510 mm (13 lamp length)
E-LINE trunking units can be
wired on site easily with the
following four options:
376
Variable system Variable system
with flatband cable with individual conductors
Earthed feeding
All through-wiring sets must
be electrically secured at
their conclusion by means
of the wiring connector
07690 VV. Mains connection
is also effected with this
component. It is fixed to a
metal contact stud at the
Reference Number of Length
beginning of the trunking and
conductors m Reference Number of Length
thus includes the complete
07690/5LV/46m 5 x 1.5 mm2 46 conductors m trunking in the earthing
07690/7LV/46m 7 x 1.5 mm2 46 07690/5LV/25m 5 x 1.5 mm2 25 process, without using tools.
377
Nodes
07690 KA/7LV
> 60
< 300
A 03 S A 03 P A 03 D
1538/58W
2000
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
378
Suspension accessories for wire,
chain or pendant suspensions
E 06 E 04 E 05 N E 01
379
E-LINE
Gear trays IP 20
768, 769 92
increased thermal safety DIN 5040
requirements. B - u = 0.71
2 - su = 0.39
1 - so = 0.29
Electrical connection 63 101
Electrical connection is
made automatically when the
gear tray is attached to the
trunking. Lamp circuit con-
nections can be set to each
phase conductor without
tools.
380
E-LINE
Gear trays IP 50
652d ]o
Degree of protect. IP 20, IP 50, IP 50 D
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.8 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
Special E-LINE gear trays in IP 50 E-LINE gear trays in version D, equipped as standard with Technical information see page 440.
offer a safe and permanent protection lamp protection tubes in polycarbonate, offer efficient pro-
against the ingression of dust. They tection in case of increased mechanical stress.
can be combined with all radial reflec-
tors and the respective optical acces- Equipped as standard with electronic control gear and rated
sories, in accordance with their IP IP 50, these versions are predestined for use in production
rating and application suitability. IP 50 sites exposed to fire hazards.
is respected in combination with all
available E-LINE trunking units. When
ordering simply add special trunking
end caps 07680 E-R and trunking con-
nection gaskets 07680 KD for the
mechanical trunking couplings.
381
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Trapezium-shaped reflector T
Application
Production facilities, work-
shops, assembly halls,
supermarkets, exhibition
halls and storage rooms.
Reflector T
Universally suitable for sin-
gle-lamp and twin-lamp gear
trays in IP 20. Trapezium-
shaped reflector made of
sheet steel, galvanised, with
white polyester coating.
Fixed to the gear tray by
means of stainless steel
snap fasteners without tools.
382
Reference Designation for Reference Designation for
gear tray gear tray
07690 T/36 Reflector T 1x36W 07690 T/36 Reflector T 2x36W
07690 T/58 Reflector T 1x58W 07690 T/58 Reflector T 2x58W
Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
07690 RKT Reflector end cap 07690 RKT Reflector end cap
07690 RVT Reflector connector 07690 RVT Reflector connector
Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
769
+07690T/ En 300 lx 500 lx
DIN 5040 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
A - u = 1.00 20 3.0 4.9 5.0 8.1
4 - su = 0.56 209 209 30 4.0 6.2 6.6 10
0 - so = 0.00 40 5.0 7.3 8.3 12
Area
50 6.0 8.4 10 14
A
in m2 60 7.0 9.6 12 16
80 9.0 12 15 20
100 11 14 18 23
150 15 19 26 32
200 20 24 33 40
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
383
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Trapezium-shaped reflector T
and lamella louvre T-RW
Application
Production facilities, work-
shops, assembly halls, sales
areas, supermarkets and
training rooms.
Reflector T
Universally suitable for sin-
gle-lamp and twin-lamp gear
trays in IP 20. Trapezium-
shaped reflector made of
sheet steel, galvanised, with
white polyester coating.
Fixed to the gear tray by
means of stainless steel
snap fasteners without tools.
Ordering example: continuous line Rapid mounting thanks to stainless Mounting and maintenance
(8 lengths) with reflectors T and steel snap fasteners made easy
lamella louvres T-RW Stainless steel snap fasteners, to be Numerous E-LINE details offer practice-
8 gear trays 7691/36 E connected without tools, allow for oriented functionality, thus saving time
Indications Page 8 reflectors 07690 T/36 rapid mounting of all gear trays and and money. Lamella louvres, specular
Trunking / accessories 374 8 lamella louvres 07690 T-RW/36 reflectors of the E-LINE range. louvres and parabolic louvres can be
Suspensions 379 7 sets of reflector connectors hung on the reflectors from either side,
Gear trays 380 07690 RVT Removal of the reflectors is equally facilitating maintenance and rapid lamp
Emergency light inserts 410 2 reflector end caps 07690 RKT facilitated: the integrated self-locking replacement.
Planning 412 device prevents inadvertent loosening
Lighting management Trunking see page 374, suspensions of the gear trays when handling the
system 431 see page 379. fasteners.
Substitute references for
computer calculations 443
Lamp characteristics 444
384
Reference Designation for Reference Designation for
gear tray gear tray
07690 T/36 Reflector T 1x36W 07690 T/36 Reflector T 2x36W
07690 T/58 Reflector T 1x58W 07690 T/58 Reflector T 2x58W
07690 T-RW/36 Lamella louvre T-RW 1x36W 07690 T-RW/36 Lamella louvre T-RW 2x36W
07690 T-RW/58 Lamella louvre T-RW 1x58W 07690 T-RW/58 Lamella louvre T-RW 2x58W
Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
07690 RKT Reflector end cap 07690 RKT Reflector end cap
07690 RVT Reflector connector 07690 RVT Reflector connector
Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
146
769
+07690T/ En 300 lx 500 lx
+07690RW/ Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.2 5.2 5.3 8.6
A - u = 1.00 209 209 30 4.3 6.6 7.1 11
4 - su = 0.56 40 5.4 7.9 8.9 13
0 - so = 0.00 Area
50 6.5 9.0 11 15
A
in m2 60 7.6 10 13 17
80 9.7 13 16 21
100 12 15 20 25
150 17 21 28 34
200 22 26 36 43
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
385
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R
Application
Production facilities, work-
shops, assembly halls,
supermarkets, exhibition
halls and sales areas.
Reflector R
Radial sheet steel reflector,
galvanised, with white poly-
ester coating. Fixed to the
gear tray by means of stain-
less steel snap fasteners
without tools.
386
Reference Designation for Reference Designation for
gear tray gear tray
07691 R/36 Reflector R 1x36W 07692 R/36 Reflector R 2x36W
07691 R/58 Reflector R 1x58W 07692 R/58 Reflector R 2x58W
Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
07691 RK Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RK Reflector end cap 2-lamp
07691 RV Reflector connector 1-lamp 07692 RV Reflector connector 2-lamp
Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652do
Degree of protect. IP 20, IP 50, IP 50 D
1 Number of luminaires
129
768, 769
+0769R/ En 300 lx 500 lx
DIN 5040 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
A - u = 1.00 20 2.8 4.5 4.7 7.5
4 - su = 0.52 175 258 30 3.8 5.8 6.3 9.7
0 - so = 0.00 40 4.7 7.0 7.8 12
Area
50 5.6 8.1 9.4 13
A
in m2 60 6.6 9.1 11 15
80 8.3 11 14 19
100 10 13 17 22
150 14 18 24 30
200 18 22 31 37
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
Snap fasteners assure the mechanical connection of the Technical information see page 440.
E-LINE trunking, gear trays and reflectors. They can be
operated without tools and are completely integrated
into the gear tray, avoiding time-consuming positioning
of fastening elements in case of the variable system.
387
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R and lamella louvre RW
Application
Production facilities, work-
shops, assembly halls,
supermarkets, exhibition
halls, sales areas and
training rooms.
Reflector R
Radial sheet steel reflector,
galvanised, with white poly-
ester coating. Fixed to the
gear tray by means of stain-
less steel snap fasteners
without tools.
Lamella louvre RW
Sheet steel, white. To be
used in reflectors 0769 R,
0769 G, 0769 RH,
0769 GH. Can be hung on
the reflector for easy mainte-
nance.
388
Reference Designation for Reference Designation for
gear tray gear tray
07691 R/36 Reflector R 1x36W 07692 R/36 Reflector R 2x36W
07691 R/58 Reflector R 1x58W 07692 R/58 Reflector R 2x58W
07691 RW/36 Lamella louvre RW 1x36W 07692 RW/36 Lamella louvre RW 2x36W
07691 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW 1x58W 07692 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW 2x58W
Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
07691 RK Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RK Reflector end cap 2-lamp
07691 RV Reflector connector 1-lamp 07692 RV Reflector connector 2-lamp
Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652do
Degree of protect. IP 20, IP 50, IP 50 D
147
768, 769
+0769R/ En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RW/ Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.0 4.7 5.1 7.9
A - u = 1.00 175 258 30 4.1 6.1 6.8 10
4 - su = 0.54 40 5.1 7.4 8.4 12
0 - so = 0.00 Area
50 6.1 8.5 10 14
A
in m2 60 7.1 9.7 12 16
80 9.0 12 15 20
100 11 14 18 23
150 16 19 26 32
200 20 24 34 40
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.2 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
E-LINE is designed for rapid electrical connection. Mains cables can be connected to the sockets of the Technical information see page 440.
through-wiring set by means of knock-out openings in
Installation is facilitated by means of standard connectors the end caps of the trunkings.
or sockets at the ends of pre-mounted through-wiring sets.
These 7-pole components do not only allow for rapid con- The mains cable can be alternatively connected to the
nection of three-phase current mains supply lines but also socket of a wiring connector in the continuous line: ceiling-
for connection of two additional conductors, e.g. control oriented knock-out openings at the beginning of the trunking
lines for dimming. The corresponding mains cables can enable cable entry at all couplings.
equally be connected to the socket.
389
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R and specular reflector SB,
wide-angle light distribution
Specular reflectors SB
Made of highly-specular
anodised aluminium for
wide-angle light distribution.
To be inserted into the
reflector 0769 R without
tools.
Lamella louvre RW
Sheet steel, white. To be
used in reflectors 0769 R.
Can be hung on the reflector
for easy maintenance.
129
769/58
+0769R/58
+0769SB/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 1.00 175 258
4 - su = 0.52
0 - so = 0.00
390
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R, specular reflector SB, wide-angle light distribution,
and lamella louvre RW
652d
Degree of protection IP 20*
*IP 50 possible please consider dust risk.
769/58
+0769R/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769SB/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
+0769RW/58
20 2.8 4.5 4.6 7.5 20 2.9 4.6 4.9 7.7
DIN 5040 175 258 30 3.7 5.7 6.1 9.6 30 3.9 6.0 6.5 10
A - u = 1.00 40 4.6 6.8 7.6 11 40 4.9 7.1 8.1 12
4 - su = 0.56 Area Area
50 5.5 7.8 9.1 13 50 5.8 8.2 9.7 14
0 - so = 0.00 A A
in m2 60 6.4 8.9 11 15 in m2 60 6.8 9.3 11 16
80 8.1 11 13 18 80 8.7 11 15 19
100 9.8 13 16 21 100 11 13 18 22
150 14 18 23 29 150 15 18 26 31
200 18 22 30 36 200 19 23 32 39
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.4 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
391
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R and specular reflector SA,
asymmetrical light distribution
Specular reflector SA
Made of highly-specular
anodised aluminium for
asymmetrical light distribu-
tion. To be inserted into the
reflector 0769 R without
tools.
Lamella louvre RW
Sheet steel, white. To be
used in reflectors 0769 R.
Can be hung on the reflector
for easy maintenance.
129
769/58
+0769R/58
+0769SA/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 1.00 175 258
4 - su = 0.52
0 - so = 0.00
392
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R, specular reflector SA, asymmetrical light distribution,
and lamella louvre RW
652d
Degree of protection IP 20*
*IP 50 possible please consider dust risk.
769/58
+0769R/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769SA/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
+0769RW/58
20 2.8 4.4 4.6 7.3 20 2.9 4.6 4.9 7.7
DIN 5040 175 258 30 3.7 5.7 6.1 9.5 30 3.9 6.0 6.5 9.9
A - u = 1.00 40 4.6 6.8 7.6 11 40 4.9 7.1 8.1 12
4 - su = 0.55 Area Area
50 5.5 7.8 9.1 13 50 5.9 8.2 9.8 14
0 - so = 0.00 A A
in m2 60 6.4 8.9 11 15 in m2 60 6.9 9.4 11 16
80 8.1 11 13 18 80 8.7 11 15 19
100 9.8 13 16 21 100 11 13 18 22
150 14 18 23 29 150 16 18 26 31
200 18 22 30 36 200 20 23 33 39
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
300
400 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
500 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
600 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h
700 Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
2.70 m
Example:
Wall zone lighting with a continuous line
(2 lengths) illuminance distribution
(indications in lux)
Room height: 3.00 m
Distance to wall: 1.10 m
Gear tray: 7692/58 E
Reflectors: 07692 R/58
Specular reflectors: 07692 SA/58
Lamp luminous flux: 5200 lm
393
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R and specular reflector ST,
narrow-angle light distribution
Specular reflectors ST
Made of highly-specular
anodised aluminium for nar-
row-angle light distribution.
To be inserted into the
reflector 0769 R without
tools.
Lamella louvre RW
Sheet steel, white. To be
used in reflectors 0769 R.
Can be hung on the reflector
for easy maintenance.
129
769/58
+0769R/58
+0769ST/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 1.00 175 258
4 - su = 0.59
0 - so = 0.00
394
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R, specular reflector ST, narrow-angle light distribution,
and lamella louvre RW
652d
Degree of protection IP 20*
*IP 50 possible please consider dust risk.
769/58
+0769R/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769ST/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
+0769RW/58
20 2.6 3.8 4.3 6.3 20 2.8 4.1 4.7 6.8
DIN 5040 175 258 30 3.4 5.0 5.7 8.4 30 3.8 5.4 6.3 9.1
A - u = 1.00 40 4.3 6.1 7.2 10 40 4.7 6.7 7.9 11
4 - su = 0.60 Area Area
50 5.2 7.2 8.7 12 50 5.7 7.8 9.5 13
0 - so = 0.00 A A
in m2 60 6.1 8.2 10 14 in m2 60 6.7 8.9 11 15
80 7.8 10 13 17 80 8.5 11 14 18
100 9.4 12 16 20 100 10 13 17 22
150 14 17 23 27 150 15 18 25 30
200 18 21 29 34 200 19 23 32 38
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.4 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
395
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Radial reflector R and prismatic diffuser P
Application
Sales areas, showrooms,
lounges, offices, precision
assembly, production facili-
ties, workshops and training
rooms.
Reflector R
Radial sheet steel reflector,
galvanised, with white poly-
ester coating. Fixed to the
gear tray by means of stain-
less steel snap fasteners
without tools.
Prismatic diffuser P
Convex-shaped diffuser
made of PLEXIGLAS, with
computer-calculated longitu-
dinal prisms. Safe retention
by means of stainless steel
clips. To be used in reflec-
tors 0769 R, 0769 G,
0769 RH, 0769 GH. Can
be hung on the reflector for
easy maintenance.
396
Reference Designation for Reference Designation for
gear tray gear tray
07691 R/58 Reflector R 1x58W 07692 R/58 Reflector R 2x58W
07691 P/58 Prismatic diffuser P 1x58W 07692 P/58 Prismatic diffuser P 2x58W
Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
07691 RK Reflecor end cap 1-lamp 07692 RK Reflector end cap 2-lamp
07691 RV Reflector connector 1-lamp 07692 RV Reflector connector 2-lamp
Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20*
*IP 50 possible please consider dust risk.
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
397
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Perforated radial reflector G
Lamella louvre RW
Sheet steel, white. To be
used in reflectors 0769 R,
0769 G, 0769 RH,
0769 GH. Can be hung on
the reflector for easy mainte-
nance.
129
769/58
+0769G/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 0.90
3 - su = 0.49 175 258
0 - so = 0.37
398
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Perforated radial reflector G
and lamella louvre RW
652d
Degree of protection IP 20*
*IP 50 possible please consider dust risk.
Number of luminaires
147
769/58
+0769G/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RW/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.2 5.0 5.3 8.4 20 3.4 5.3 5.6 8.8
B - u = 0.86 175 258 30 4.2 6.5 7.0 11 30 4.5 6.9 7.5 11
4 - su = 0.52 40 5.3 7.8 8.8 13 40 5.6 8.2 9.4 14
1 - so = 0.39 Area Area
50 6.3 9.0 11 15 50 6.8 9.5 11 16
A A
in m2 60 7.3 10 12 17 in m2 60 7.9 11 13 18
80 9.3 12 15 21 80 10 13 17 22
100 11 15 19 24 100 12 16 20 26
150 16 20 27 33 150 17 22 29 36
200 20 25 34 42 200 22 27 37 45
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Nice surroundings Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
Thanks to their indirect com- 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
ponent, perforated reflectors g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.4 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.4 h
create a well-balanced Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
brightness distribution within h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
the room. The friendly visual 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
ambience and the attractive for no. characteristics for no. characteristics
of luminaires of luminaires
design make this E-LINE ver-
In combination LB L In combination LB L
sion the perfect choice for with direct indirect with direct indirect
sales-promoting illumination gear tray M DLOR ULOR gear tray M DLOR ULOR
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.77 0.70 0.07 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.71 0.61 0.10
of shop premises. 2 x 58 W 0.49 0.79 0.69 0.10 2 x 58 W 0.49 0.73 0.61 0.12
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.77 0.70 0.07 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.71 0.61 0.10
2 x 58 W E 0.51 0.79 0.69 0.10 2 x 58 W E 0.51 0.73 0.61 0.12
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
399
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
High reflector RH
and semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Semi-specular
cross-blade louvre RSV
For narrow/wide-angle light
distribution, with graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades, made of anodised
aluminium. To be used in
reflectors 0769 RH,
0769 GH. Can be hung
on the reflector for easy
maintenance.
C 0 - C 180 Data table
Semi-specular parabolic No. 2145
louvre RMV for combination
143
142
769/58
Made of semi-specular an- +0769RH/58
+0769RSV/58
odised aluminium with a sur-
DIN 5040
face purity of 99.98 %. High A - u = 1.00 176 258
visual comfort due to a uni- 5 - su = 0.68
0 - so = 0.00
form louvre appearance with
reduced brightness con-
trasts. To be used in reflec-
tors 0769 RH, 0769 GH.
Can be hung on the reflector
for easy maintenance.
400
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
High reflector RH
and semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
769/58
+0769RH/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RMV/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.0 4.4 5.0 7.4 20 2.9 4.3 4.8 7.2
A - u = 1.00 176 258 30 4.1 5.9 6.9 9.8 30 4.0 5.3 6.6 8.9
5 - su = 0.70 40 5.2 7.1 8.7 12 40 5.1 6.3 8.4 11
0 - so = 0.00 Area Area
50 6.3 8.3 11 14 50 6.2 7.9 10 13
A A
in m2 60 7.5 9.6 12 16 in m2 60 7.3 9.0 12 15
80 9.6 12 16 20 80 9.4 11 16 19
100 12 14 20 23 100 11 14 19 22
150 17 20 29 33 150 17 19 28 31
200 22 25 37 42 200 22 25 37 41
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Glare-free lighting with Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
semi-specular cross- 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
blade louvres RSV g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h
Visual details, low contrasts Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
or frequent change of views h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
require increased illumi- 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
nances and freedom from for no. characteristics for no. characteristics
of luminaires of luminaires
glare, e.g. in case of preci-
In combination LB L In combination LB L
sion mechanics, electronic with direct indirect with direct indirect
production or testing of gear tray M DLOR ULOR gear tray M DLOR ULOR
1 x 36 W 1.52 0.64 0.64 0.00 1 x 36 W 1.52 0.64 0.64 0.00
goods. 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.63 0.63 0.00 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.63 0.63 0.00
2 x 36 W 0.76 0.64 0.64 0.00 2 x 36 W 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.50 0.63 0.63 0.00 2 x 58 W 0.49 0.64 0.64 0.00
RSV louvres have been 1 x 36 W E 1.58 0.64 0.64 0.00 1 x 36 W E 1.58 0.64 0.64 0.00
designed for these visual 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.63 0.63 0.00 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.63 0.63 0.00
2 x 36 W E 0.79 0.64 0.64 0.00 2 x 36 W E 0.78 0.65 0.65 0.00
tasks: The concave-profiled 2 x 58 W E 0.52 0.63 0.63 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.51 0.64 0.64 0.00
cross blades reproduce a
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
parabolic contour, section
by section, which allows for
a particularly effective light
direction. Lighting installa-
tions with RSV louvres can
be set to more than 1000 lx,
with complete glare
limitation.
401
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
High reflector RH
and highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application
Production facilities or work-
shops with CNC machines,
switchgear control rooms,
offices and rooms with DSE
workstations.
Reflector RH
For gear trays in IP 20.
Radial sheet steel reflector,
galvanised, with white poly-
ester coating. High form,
especially recommended for
combination with louvres
RSV, RMV, RPV. Fixed to the
gear tray by means of stain-
less steel snap fasteners
without tools.
Highly-specular parabolic
louvre RPV
Made of highly-specular
anodised aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.98 %.
Luminance limited to
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60, thus corre-
sponding fully to LG 3,
Cat. II. To be used in reflec-
tors 0769 RH, 0769 GH.
Can be hung on the reflector
for easy maintenance.
402
Reference Designation for Reference Designation for
gear tray gear tray
07691 RH/36 High reflector RH 1x36W 07692 RH/36 High reflector RH 2x36W
07691 RH/58 High reflector RH 1x58W 07692 RH/58 High reflector RH 2x58W
07691 RPV/36 Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 1x36W 07692 RPV/36 Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 2x36W
07691 RPV/58 Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 1x58W 07692 RPV/58 Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 2x58W
Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
07691 RKH Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 2-lamp
07691 RVH Reflector connector 1-lamp 07692 RVH Reflector connector 2-lamp
Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
769/58
+0769RH/58 En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RPV/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.0 4.5 5.0 7.4
A - u = 1.00 176 258 30 4.1 5.9 6.8 9.8
5 - su = 0.68 40 5.2 7.1 8.6 12
0 - so = 0.00 Area
50 6.3 8.3 10 14
A
in m2 60 7.4 9.5 12 16
80 9.5 12 16 20
100 12 14 19 23
150 17 20 28 32
200 22 25 36 41
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
403
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Perforated high reflector GH
and semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Semi-specular
cross-blade louvre RSV
For narrow/wide-angle light
distribution, with graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades, made of anodised
aluminium. To be used in
reflectors 0769 RH,
0769 GH. Can be hung
C 0 - C 180 Data table
on the reflector for easy No. 2148
maintenance. for combination
143
142
769/58
+0769GH/58
+0769RSV/58
Highly-specular parabolic
DIN 5040
louvre RPV B - u = 0.86 176 258
Made of highly-specular 5 - su = 0.67
1 - so = 0.46
anodised aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.98 %.
Luminance limited to
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60, thus corre-
sponding fully to LG 3,
Cat. II. To be used in reflec-
tors 0769 RH, 0769 GH.
Can be hung on the reflector
for easy maintenance.
404
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Perforated high reflector GH
and highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
769/58
+0769GH/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RPV/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.7 5.5 6.1 9.2 20 3.8 5.6 6.3 9.3
B - u = 0.88 176 258 30 5.0 6.9 8.3 12 30 5.2 7.0 8.6 12
5 - su = 0.69 40 6.3 8.2 11 14 40 6.6 8.3 11 14
2 - so = 0.53 Area Area
50 7.7 10 13 17 50 8.1 10 13 17
A A
in m2 60 9.0 11 15 19 in m2 60 9.4 12 16 20
80 12 14 19 24 80 12 15 20 25
100 14 17 23 28 100 15 18 25 29
150 21 24 34 39 150 22 25 36 41
200 27 30 45 51 200 28 32 47 53
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
405
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Self-suspended specular reflector STF,
narrow/wide-angle light distribution
Self-suspended specular
reflector STF
Made of highly-specular
anodised aluminium for
narrow/wide-angle light
distribution. To be fixed
directly to gear trays in
IP 20.
Self-suspended specular
reflector SAF
Made of highly-specular an-
odised aluminium for asym-
metrical light distribution.
To be fixed directly to gear
trays in IP 20.
138
138
769/58
+07690STF/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 1.00
4 - su = 0.60 184 184
0 - so = 0.00
406
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Self-suspended specular reflector SAF,
asymmetrical light distribution
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.2 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.4 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
407
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Self-suspended specular reflector HRF,
extremely narrow-angle light distribution
Application
High-bay warehouses, high
gangways and high halls.
Self-suspended
reflector HRF
Made of highly-specular
anodised aluminium, for
extremely narrow-angle light
distribution. To be fixed
directly to gear trays in IP 20.
Indications Page
Trunking / accessories 374
Suspensions 379
Gear trays 380
Emergency light inserts 410
Planning 412
Lighting management
system 431
Substitute references for
computer calculations 443
Lamp characteristics 444
408
Reference Designation for
gear trays
07691 HRF/58 Extremely narrow-angle reflector HRF 1 x 58 W
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
C 0 - C 180 Photometric
data for
combination
138
7691/58
+ 07691 HRF/58
Classification
DIN 5040:
A - u = 1.00
A - su = 0.67 223
A - so = 0.00
L 300 300
luminous intensity distribu-
Point illuminance EP in lx
250
B=6m tion with high light output
200 200 ratios, allowing efficient reali-
150 h=6m sation of standard-conform
h h = 14 m
illuminances even in case of
100 100 elevated light point heights.
50 50 h = 22 m
y 20 h = 30 m
x 0 0
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 0 1m 2m 3m
B/2 e
B Light point height Lat. distance x to
h in m gangway centre
409
E-LINE
Gear trays for emergency lighting
Workplaces with min. 0.1Em3) max. 0.5 s Time of Single batteries Permanent
special risk min. 15 lx risk Specially safe- switching not
guarded mains necessary
1)
Central battery, group battery with or without inventor, rapid stand-by and
immediate stand-by power generator.
2)
... in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised.
3)
Em = Maintenance value of illuminance.
A B Illustration A:
Emergency lighting takes over in the event of mains failure
8 10
8 10
Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx 7691/58 + E 14
of the general artificial lighting. It has to ensure that activities batten
can be ended without risk and working facilities can be left
6
6
Illustration B:
7691/58 + E 14
4
4
safely. Emergency lighting is divided into stand-by lighting 5 lx 1 lx
in combination with reflector R
2
and safety lighting. The safety lighting is further divided into 1 lx 5 lx Illustration C:
0
m
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10
Safety lighting for workplaces with special risks. Illustration D:
0
5 lx 5 lx
7692/58 + E 14
2
1 lx
6
6
10 8
10 8
Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx
Suspension length 3 m
C m D Suspension length 5 m
Equipment options Isolux curves The following luminous fluxes + E14 Gear tray
for 5-conductor (5LV) and Illuminances achieved with are taken into account: Gear trays for continuous Sheet steel, white. Fixed to
7-conductor (7LV) wiring E-LINE gear trays for safety lines and individual luminaires the trunking by means of
lighting are documented in Isolux curves + E14 with emergency light socket stainless steel snap fasteners,
Mains cable 5 cond.
Mains cable 3 cond.
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst.
EB single battery
UR switch. relay
E 14 socket
No. of conductors
Wiring type
the isolux curves opposite. Equipment: tubular incandes- E14, red-marked, IP 20. without tools. With low-loss
They refer to a level on the cent lamp, 40 W, luminous ballasts and plug-in terminal
floor and a light loss factor flux 380 lm. 7691 for 1 fluorescent for series capacitors to oper-
of 0.8. Indirect portions are lamp 36 W with additional ate the general lighting.
not taken into consideration. Isolux curves + EB emergency light socket E14
Equipment: triphosphor fluo- for tubular incandescent Electrical connection
rescent lamps 58 W. Lumi- lamps up to 40 W as well as The electrical connection with
3 3 nous flux 5200 lm (referred for compact fluorescent general and safety lighting
to nominal operation). The lamps with integrated ballast. circuit is made automatically
3 1 4
diagrams opposite are based Max. lamp length 126 mm, when the gear tray is attached
3 2 5 on battery operation with max. diameter 42 mm. to the trunking. Lamp circuit
5LV
3 2 5 25% luminous flux. connections can be set to the
3 2 5 7692 for 2 fluorescent phase conductor without
Isolux curves + UR lamps 58 W with additional tools.
5 5 Equipment: triphosphor fluo- emergency light socket E14
3 2 1 6 rescent lamps 58 W, luminous for tubular incandescent
3 2 2 7 flux 5200 lm. lamps up to 40 W e.g.
OSRAM T30/73 (40 W).
3 2 2 7
In case of deviating luminous Max. lamp length 73 mm,
5 1 6 7LV fluxes the illuminance values max. diameter 42 mm.
5 2 7 must be corrected accor-
5 2 7
dingly.
5 2 7
Indications Page
Emergency light 428
410
Reference Nominal Lamps IP kg Reference Lamps IP kg
Gear trays with operating time rating Gear trays with rating
single battery supply for switching relay for
permanent switching permanent switching
7691/58 E + EB (1 h) 1 hour 1 x 58 W IP 20 2.6 7691/58 E + UR 1 x 58 W IP 20 1.4
7691/58 E + EB (3 h) 3 hours 1 x 58 W IP 20 3.2 7692/58 E + UR 2 x 58 W IP 20 1.6
7692/58 E + EB (1 h) 1 hour 2 x 58 W IP 20 2.8
7692/58 E + EB (3 h) 3 hours 2 x 58 W IP 20 3.4
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
A B Illustration A: A B Illustration A:
8 10
8 10
12 16
12 16
Illustration B: Illustration B:
8
7691/58 E + EB 1 lx 7691/58 E + UR
4
5 lx 1 lx 1 lx
in combination with reflector R in combination with reflector R
4
4
2
1 lx 5 lx 5 lx 5 lx
Illustration C: Illustration C:
0
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 16 12 8 4 0 0 4 8 12 16
7692/58 E + EB 7692/58 E + UR
m
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 batten 16 12 8 4 0 0 4 8 12 16 batten
0
0
1 lx 5 lx 5 lx 5 lx
Illustration D: Illustration D:
2
5 lx 1 lx 7692/58 E + EB 1 lx 7692/58 E + UR
4
1 lx
6
12
12
10 8
10 8
16
411
E-LINE
Planning, ordering and installation
Overhang
min. 50 mm/max. 500 mm
As to trunking units in module Ordering example: 1. Trunking Trunking units, 2 lengths ............................2 x 07690/II/36-7LV
510 mm to be wired on site, Non-interrupted continuous line 36 W Trunking units, 3 lengths ............................2 x 07690/III/36-7LV
please check the tables on with prewired trunking (7-conductor
2. Trunking and fixing Trunking end caps ..............................................2 x 07690 E-T
wiring).
page 413 with information on accessory Ceiling fixing clamps ..................................................6 x D 01 X
additional trunking sections 12.31 m long (equals 10 lamp lengths),
which might be necessary. equipped with single-lamp dimmable gear 3. Gear tray Gear trays, single-lamp ....................................10 x 7691/36 ED
trays, trapezium-shaped reflectors and
lamella louvres. Direct ceiling mounting. 4. Reflector + accessory Reflectors, trapezium-shaped............................10 x 07690 T/36
IP 20. Reflector connectors ..........................................9 x 07690 RVT
Reflector end caps ..............................................2 x 07690 RKT
412
Spacing between fixings Further spacings between fixings
max. 2500 mm max. 2500 mm
Planning suggestions for modular system Planning suggestions for modular system
with 510 mm spacing between the gear trays 58 W with 1020 mm spacing between the gear trays 58 W
Run Lamp Trunking Additional trunking section Fixing Run Lamp Trunking Additional trunking section Fixing
length length 07690/ 07690/ 07690/ 07690/ points length length 07690 07690 07690 07690 points
/II/58 U /III/58 U /510/U /1020/U /II/58 U /III/58 U /510/U /1020/U
m No. Pieces Pieces Pieces Pieces No. m No. Pieces Pieces Pieces Pieces No.
3.58 2 1 1 3 4.09 2 1 1 3
5.62 3 1 1 3 6.64 3 2 1 4
7.66 4 1 1 4 9.19 4 2 5
9.70 5 2 1 5 11.74 5 2 1 1 6
11.74 6 2 1 1 6 14.29 6 3 1 7
13.78 7 3 7 16.84 7 1 3 8
15.82 8 2 2 1 7 19.39 8 4 1 9
17.86 9 1 3 1 8 21.94 9 1 4 1 10
19.90 10 2 3 9 24.49 10 2 4 11
21.94 11 1 4 1 10 27.04 11 1 5 1 12
23.98 12 5 1 11 29.59 12 2 5 1 13
26.02 13 1 5 11 32.14 13 7 14
28.06 14 6 1 12 34.69 14 2 6 1 15
30.10 15 2 5 1 13 37.24 15 8 1 16
32.14 16 7 14 39.79 16 1 8 17
34.18 17 2 6 1 15 42.34 17 9 1 18
36.22 18 1 7 1 16 44.89 18 1 9 1 19
38.26 19 2 7 16 47.44 19 2 9 20
40.30 20 1 8 1 17 49.99 20 1 10 1 21
IP 50
Special gear trays for 58 W
fluorescent lamps are avail-
Ordering example: 1. Trunking Trunking units, 3 lengths ................................2 x 07690/III/58-U able for continuous lines or
Modular continuous line 58 W with Additional trunking............................................1 x 07690/510/U individual luminaires in IP 50
trunking to be wired on site and reference 7681/58 or
2. Trunking and fixing Trunking end caps ................................................2 x 07690 E-R
uniform blanking cover spacings of
510 mm between the gear trays
accessory Blanking covers ..............................................4 x 07690 B/510 7682/58. This allows to
Through-wiring set ................................1 x 07690/5LV-510/46m realise non-interrupted contin-
9.70 m long (equals 5 lamp lengths and Wiring connector ..................................................1 x 07690 VV uous lines or continuous lines
4 blanking covers 510 mm), equipped with Decorative wire suspensions ..................................5 x A 01 DSX
twin-lamp gear trays with electronic control with IP 50 blanking covers for
gear (E), radial reflectors and parabolic 3. Gear tray Gear trays, twin-lamp ..........................................5 x 7692/58 E module 1530 mm.
louvres. Decorative wire suspension. IP 20.
4. Reflector + accessory Radial reflectors ..............................................5 x 07692 RH/58 In addition, special trunking
Reflector end caps ............................................10 x 07692 RKH end caps 07680 E-R and
5. Optical Highly-specular parabolic louvres ....................5 x 07692 RPV/58
gasket accessories 07680 KD
equipment for the joints are neccessary
in order to observe IP 50.
Only radial reflectors and
corresponding optical acces-
sories are used trapezium-
shaped or industrial self-
Ordering example: 1. Trunking Trunking units, 3 lengths ................................3 x 07690/III/58-U suspended reflectors are not
Modular continuous line 58 W with Additional trunking............................................1 x 07690/510/U available for IP 50.
trunking to be wired on site and
2. Trunking and fixing Trunking end caps ................................................2 x 07690 E-T
uniform blanking cover spacings of
accessory Blanking covers ............................................5 x 07690 B/1020
1020 mm between the gear trays
Through-wiring set ................................1 x 07690/5LV-510/46m
14.29 m long (equals 6 lamp lengths and Wiring connector ..................................................1 x 07690 VV
5 blanking covers 1020 mm), equipped with Wire suspensions......................................................7 x A 01 SX
single-lamp gear trays and industrial self-
suspended reflectors, asymmetrical light 3. Gear tray Gear trays, single-lamp............................................6 x 7691/58
distribution. Wire suspension. IP 20.
4. Reflectors Industrial self-suspended reflectors, asymm.....6 x 07690 SAF/58
413
Rapid-mounting continuous-line luminaires
with silicate glass cover
Optical system
Highly-specular, anodised
reflectors for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution.
Luminaire body
With integrated trunking,
sheet steel, white, stove-
enamelled. Gear tray can be
removed and hung in the
luminaire body without using
tools. Protection against
soiling by means of silicate
glass cover, clear, safely
retained in a continuous
frame, easily lowered and
removed for maintenance.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, each lamp
length with 4-pole connec-
tion terminal and additional
earth connection terminal for
wires up to 2.5 mm2, con-
nected with individual wires
5 x 1.5 mm2. Electrical con-
nection with gear tray by
means of 4-pole female con-
nector, quick-release button
to rearrange the lamp circuit
connection to L1, L2 or L3.
With two grommets at each
front plane for mains supply
and further wiring. With
low-loss ballasts.
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
Luminaires can also be sup- No. 2152
plied with electronic control DIN 5040: A40
gear, reference suffix E, CIBSE BZ:
e.g. 7961 S/I/58 E. BZ3
Versions equipped with elec- NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/1/BZ3
tronic control gear are suit-
able for use in production
sites exposed to fire hazards
caused by dust and fibrous
substance.
414
Reference Lamps LxWxH kg Reference Lamps LxWxH kg
W mm W mm
7962 S/I/58 2x58 1555x228x135 13.4 7963 S/I/58 3x58 1555x372x187 21.2
7962 S/II/58 4x58 3103x228x135 26.8 7963 S/II/58 6x58 3103x372x187 42.2
7962 S/III/58 6x58 4651x228x135 40.2 7963 S/III/58 9x58 4651x372x187 63.6
652d (o
Degree of protection IP 50
415
796
Accessories and fixing spacings
Fixing spacings:
Direct ceiling mounting
Suspended mounting
416
Spacing between fixings
max. 2280 (796/III/58)
5 lamp lengths and fixing spacings of max. 2330 mm 5 lamp lengths and max. 2330 mm suspension spacing
(2-length trunking) or 2280 mm (3-length trunking) result result in 4 suspension points according to the table above.
in 5 fixing points according to the table above.
417
Batten luminaires
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, with white poly-
ester coating, end caps
made of white polystyrene
plastic.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 2-pole
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2 and additional
earth connection terminal.
With inductive ballasts.
Reflectors (accessories)
1 piece, solvent-free pow-
der-coated sheet steel,
white. Universally suitable
for single- and twin-lamp
versions:
01615 R/36 for 36 W,
01615 R/58 for 58 W.
418
Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg
Luminaire + reflector* W mm Luminaire + reflector* W mm
1615/36 + 01615 R/36 1x36 900 165 450 3.7 1615/236 + 01615 R/36 2x36 900 165 450 5.9
1615/58 + 01615 R/58 1x58 1100 215 550 4.9 1615/258 + 01615 R/58 2x58 1100 215 550 7.3
* Accessories, to be ordered separately. * Accessories, to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
Tested safety
Standard TRILUX luminaires are marked with the ENEC, EMV
as well as the fire protection label, thus documenting that
the luminaires were tested by a neutral certification institute
and that the current production is being supervised.
419
Individual battens
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, white, galva-
nised. End caps made of
plastic ABS, white. Easy
mounting by means of
separate mounting profile.
Ceiling-oriented integrated
channel duct for external
mains supply and further
wiring. Luminaires are fixed
to the mounting profile by
means of plastic-coated
metal turn-lock fasteners
without using tools.
Electrical connection
Plug-type connection for
wires up to 2.5 mm2 to
3-pole (including earth con-
nection terminal) female con-
nector located at the mount-
ing profile. Luminaire con-
nection is made automatical-
ly when placing the luminaire
on the mounting profile. With
low-loss ballasts.
420
Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg
Luminaire + reflector* W mm Luminaire + reflector* W mm
6141/36 + 06140 R/36 1x36 920 156 3.6 6142/36 + 06140 R/36 2x36 920 156 4.4
6141/58 + 06140 R/58 1x58 1100 216 4.8 6142/58 + 06140 R/58 2x58 1100 216 6.1
* Accessories, to be ordered separately. * Accessories, to be ordered separately.
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
421
Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q
symmetrical
Application
High rooms, halls, storage
facilities and production
sites, trade fair and exhibi-
tion halls. In combination
with cover suitable for use
in high sports halls, damp
or corrosive environments
and covered exterior areas.
HST-HIT
Hybrid version can be
optionally equipped with
tubular high-pressure sodium
vapour lamps or tubular
metal halide lamps.
Optical system
Narrow/wide-angle optical
system for symmetrical light
distribution. Reflector made
of anodised aluminium.
SD textured, specular,
SH smooth, highly-spec-
ular.
Luminaire body
Powder-coated sheet steel,
white, separate ballast hous-
ing and lamp housing. Gear
tray with all operating com-
ponents can be swung out.
Plug-type luminaire fixing on
enclosed galvanised mount-
ing plate. Cable entry by
means of two grommets
Pg 16 for mains supply
and further wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with 5-pole
connection terminal for wires
up to 4 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
inductive ballasts,
HST-HIT with integrated
thermal fuse.
TRILUX industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q are equipped with Lamella louvres and covers
specular reflectors made of anodised aluminium. Adapted to Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q can be equipped with alu-
Indications Page tubular HST/HIT lamps or ellipsoid HME lamps, equipment- minium louvres and/or glass covers. In combination with
Cover 424 optimised reflectors with a textured or smooth surface are covers made of thermally hardened safety glass, WINLIGHT
Lamella louvre 425 used. luminaires are resistant to ball impact and protected against
Emergency light 428 moisture and the ingression of dust in accordance with
Lamp characteristics 444 IP 54. Accessories are described on page 424/425.
422
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
7981 SD/HST150 1xHST150 400 204 252 10.0 7983 SH/1xHME250 1xHME250 400 204 252 13.4
7981 SD/HST-HIT250* 1xHST/HIT250 400 204 252 11.1 7983 SH/1xHME400 1xHME400 400 204 252 14.7
7983 SD/1xHST-HIT400*1xHST/HIT400 400 204 252 14.9
* In case luminaires are utilised without cover GA, only use lamps suitable for operation
in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
652d ?*e
O
Degree of protection IP 20
With covers GA IP 54
423
Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q
asymmetrical
Application
High rooms, halls, storage
facilities and production
sites, trade fair and exhibi-
tion halls. In combination
with cover suitable for use
in high sports halls, damp
or corrosive environments
and covered exterior areas.
HST-HIT
Hybrid version can be
optionally equipped with
tubular high-pressure sodium
vapour lamps or tubular
metal halide lamps.
Optical system
With asymmetrical light dis-
tribution. Reflector made of
anodised aluminium,
AD textured, specular,
AH smooth, highly-spec-
ular.
Luminaire body
Powder-coated sheet steel,
white, separate ballast hous-
ing and lamp housing. Gear
tray with all operating com-
ponents can be swung out.
Plug-type luminaire fixing on
enclosed galvanised mount-
ing plate. Cable entry by
means of two grommets
Pg 16 for mains supply
and further wiring.
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection, with 5-pole
connection terminal for wires
up to 4 mm2, including earth
connection terminal. With
inductive ballasts,
HST-HIT with integrated
thermal fuse.
424
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
7981 AD/HST150 1xHST150 400 204 252 10.0 7983 AH/1xHME250 1xHME250 400 204 252 13.4
7981 AD/HST-HIT250* 1xHST/HIT250 400 204 252 11.1 7983 AH/1xHME400 1xHME400 400 204 252 14.7
7983 AD/1xHST-HIT400*1xHST/HIT400 400 204 252 14.9
* In case luminaires are utilised without cover GA, only use lamps suitable for operation
in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
652d ?*e
O
Degree of protection IP 20
With covers GA IP 54
425
Trunking for ceiling mounting and
suspended mounting of surface-mounted luminaires
Reference Length kg
mm
07690/II/36-U 2460 2.4
07690/III/36-U 3690 3.6
07690/II/58-U 3060 3.0
07690/III/58-U 4590 4.5
Trunking
For ceiling mounting and for
suspended mounting of
surface-mounted luminaires.
Can also be used as wiring
channel.
Trunking made of sheet
steel, galvanised, with white
polyester coating, as stand-
ard with stable couplings,
galvanised.
/II/ twin-length version,
/III/ triple-length
version.
Wiring feeding
at the ceiling by means
of unilateral knock-out
openings at a distance of
220 mm and 385 mm from
62 max. 775 max. 2325
the trunking beginning,
max. 150
at the front planes by
41
means of knock-out
openings in the end caps
07690 E-T.
110 180 1530 180 110
Wiring arrangement
within the trunking for
max. 2 sheathed cables
5 x 2.5 mm2 or approx.
25 individual conductors.
1538/58W
Cable holders 07690 LHI
to be ordered separately 2000
for this purpose.
wiring arrangement on the
trunking upper plane with
cable holders 07690 LHA
to be ordered separately
(see page 375).
07690 TL 07690 VK 07690 LHI
Counter-balance weights
for luminaires to suspended
trunkings
Counter-bal-
Series lance weight
1510/136 05000 A1
1510/136 E 05000 A4 07690 E-T 07690 B/ 07690/5LV/25m
1510/158 05000 A1
1510/158 E 05000 A4
1510/236 2x 05000 A4 Luminaire fixing device Connection terminal Internal cable holder
1510/236 E 05000 A4 07690 TL 07690 VK 07690 LHI
1510/258 2x 05000 A1 1 pair, sheet steel, galvanised, 4-pole, with earth connection 10 pieces, for approx. 4.5 m
1510/258 E 05000 A1 for mounting of luminaires, terminal for mains supply and trunking length, plastic,
333 03331 TRS* to be positioned within the further wiring for wires up for max. 25 individual wires
5001/36 05000 A10** trunking at will. to 2.5 mm2. Earth connection 2.5 mm2, to be snapped into
5001/58 05000 A11** Not for 333 (see page 273). of the trunking is effected the trunking without tools.
5001/E 05000 A12** automatically.
5002/E 05000 A12** End cap 07690 E-T Through-wiring set
5041 05000 A19 1 piece, plastic, white, with Blanking cover 07690/5LV/25m
* Trunking fixing including counter-balance two knock-out openings, to 07690 B/36, 07690 B/58 5 colour-coded, intertwined,
weight, see page 273. be snapped into the trunking Plastic extrusion 1230 mm heat-resistant individual
** Additional distance plates 05000 DS
are necessary for fixing the luminaires, front planes. 2 pieces of or 1530 mm long, white, can wires 1.5 mm2, 25 m long.
see page 209. end caps are required per be easily shortened on site.
continuous line.
426
Trunking units with nodes
The combinations of trunking
units and nodes offer addi-
tional scope for planning and
realisation of lighting installa-
60 tions. Continuously adjustable
angles and cross points with
up to four connections create
300
the conditions for optimally
adjusted geometries. Stylish
geometrical arrangements
offer interior design perspec-
Node with wire Node with pendant Ceiling node A 03 D Node adapter tives.
suspension A 03 S suspension A 03 P 1 piece, for up to four con- 07690 KA/7LV
1 piece, consisting of: 1 piece, consisting of: nections, angles continuously 1 piece, for the connection
1 node for up to four con- 1 node for up to four con- adjustable between 60 and of nodes A 03 with
nections, angles continu- nections, angles continu- 300. Die-cast aluminium, trunkings 07690, con-
ously adjustable between ously adjustable between white. sisting of:
60 and 300, die-cast 60 and 300, die-cast 1 adapter profile, white
aluminium, white, aluminium, white, Ordering example: sheet steel, with integrated
1 steel wire, 2.0 mm, 1 steel pendant rod, X-shaped node with 4 con- adapter element made of
galvanised, 1500 mm 13 mm, with vernier clip nections: die-cast aluminium, white,
long, length continuously for height compensation of 1 ceiling node A 03 D, 1 stable inner coupling,
adjustable without using up to 20 mm, 1500 mm 4 adapters 07690 KA/7LV. sheet steel, galvanised,
tools, long, to be shortened on 1 blanking cover, plastic
1 ceiling fixing unit, with site threading not extrusion, white,
threaded cap. required. 1 through-wiring set
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, 7 x 1.5 mm2.
white.
500
x. 1
ma
500
x. 2
ma
Vernier clip for more Ceiling rose 05900 A* When mounting more than Spacings between fixings Suspension accessories
flexibility (not illustrated) 1 piece, for two node adapters, the for suspended mounting Continuous grooves in the
The stainless steel vernier clip the connection of the mains spacing between fixings is with nodes inclined upper planes of the
of the pendant suspension can cable in case of ceiling out- reduced to max. 1500 mm. The maximum suspension trunkings enable the tool-free
be removed or re-attached lets. spacings according to the attachment of stainless steel
without tools, allowing Feeding tube* drafts above are to be clamps of suspension or
easy adaptation to reduced Ceiling rose 05900 AN* 1 piece, plastic, white, observed for nodes with wire ceiling fixing accessories at
suspension lengths. 1 piece, for the connection 10 mm, to be shortened or pendant suspensions. The will (suspension accessories
of the mains cable in case of on site. To guide and cover maximum spacing between see page 379).
ceiling outlets. Suitable to the mains cable. fixings for nodes with one
receive the ceiling fixing unit 05000 ZR 1 m long, or two connections is max.
of A 03 S. 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, 2500 mm.
in combination with A 03 S.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
427
Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting takes EN 1838 requires a minimum Anti-panic lighting is required Safety lighting for workplaces Stand-by lighting takes over
over in the event of mains safety lighting illuminance of to avoid disturbance in case with special risk must be the tasks of the general arti-
failure of the general artificial 1 lx along the centre axis of the failure of artificial provided to enable necessary ficial lighting as a substitute
lighting. It has to ensure that on the floor. The centre line lighting, thus assuring a safe tasks to be completed with- for the essentially unaltered
activities can be ended with- of the escape route (not less arrival of the escape routes. out hazards, thus observing continuation of the vital activ-
out risk and working facilities than half the route width) Apart from 0.5 m wide mar- the safety of the present ities.
can be left safely. Emer- has to be illuminated with ginal zones, the minimum persons and the service per-
gency lighting is divided into at least 50 % of this value. horizontal illuminance of 0.5 lx sonnel. If stand-by lighting is arranged
stand-by lighting and safety The relation of the highest on the free floor surface is for organisational reasons
lighting. The safety lighting is to the lowest illuminance on required. In all other aspects In order to limit the physio- instead of safety reasons
further divided into Safety the centre line of the escape the same requirements as to logical glare, maximum lumi- (e.g. to prevent lost produc-
lighting for escape routes, route may not exceed 40 : 1. horizontal escape routes nous intensities depending tion) the minimum general
Anti-panic lighting and TRILUX emergency light apply. on the light point height h illuminance must be observed.
Safety lighting for work- inserts in luminaires for work- are required, e.g. 3200 cd
places with special risks. ing facilities surely observe for 2.5 m h < 3.0 m. If stand-by lighting would
the required limits of the take over tasks of the emer-
physiological glare. gency lighting, the require-
ments described in EN 1838
must be met.
General requirements as Requirements Minimum Switching period Emergency power source Illumination of
to the safety power supply illuminance Nominal op- Admissible escape signs
erating time alternatives1)
installation
Fundamental requirements as Meeting rooms 1 lx max. 1 s 3h Permanent
Business rooms switching
to the safety power supply Exhibition rooms
installation of the safety
lighting are described in the Meeting rooms with 1 lx max. 1 s 3h Single batteries Permanent
max. 20 safety switching
table opposite. luminaires
Schools 1 lx max. 15 s 3h Single batteries Permanent
The information is based Emergency power generator switching
on EN 1838 and
DIN VDE 0108 part 1. Escape routes in 1 lx 50 % of required 1h Single batteries Permanent
working facilities illuminance in 5 s, Emergency power generator switching
100 % in 60 s Specially safeguarded mains not necessary
Anti-panic- 0.5 lx 50 % of required 1h No information No information
lighting2) illuminance in 5 s,
100 % in 60 s
Workplaces with min. 0.1 Em3) max. 0.5 s Time of Single batteries Permanent
special risk min. 15 lx risk Specially safeguarded mains switching
not necessary
1)
Central battery, group battery with or without inventor, rapid stand-by and
immediate stand-by power generator.
2)
...in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised.
3)
Em = Maintenance value of illuminance.
428
Emergency components
for louvre luminaires
Plug-in socket 545/E14 Single battery systems 545/2G7 With 2-pole connection terminal for
for permanent and stand-by switching, for stand-by switching, consisting of one wires up to 2.5 mm2 for the connection
consisting of a socket E14, charac- socket 2G7 for compact fluorescent of the charging circuit.
terised by a green dot, for tubular lamps TC-EL 11 W. Including stainless EB1
incandescent lamps or compact fluo- steel clamps for attachment to louvre with gear tray for recess mounting in
rescent lamps with integrated elec- lateral reflectors, single supply unit with surface-mounted or suspended louvre
tronic control gear. Lamp rating max. sealed high-temperature nickel-cadmi- luminaires according to selection table.
25 W, lamp diameter max. 30 mm. um accumulators and connection wiring EB2
Including stainless steel clamps for with plug-in coupling. Nominal operation with housing to be installed outside, for
attachment to louvre lateral reflectors, time 3 hours. Transit time < 0.5 s. recessed louvre luminaires according
2-pole connection terminal for wires Integrated LED in socket as indication to selection table.
up to 2.5 mm2 on self-adhesive clamp for charging.
support and connection wiring with Photometric data are documented in
plug-in coupling. the Isolux curve diagram 3.
Isolux curve diagram1 Isolux curve diagram2 Isolux curve diagram3 Explanation of Isolux
545/E14 545/E14 545/2G7... curve diagrams
Tubular lamp 25 W, Tubular lamp 25 W, Compact fluorescent Illuminances for safety light-
165 lm 165 lm lamp TC-EL 11 W,
120 lm
ing are documented in the
Light point height Light point height Light point height Isolux curves opposite. They
2.5 m 5.5 m 2.5 m refer to a level on the floor
3.0 m 7.0 m 3.0 m and a light loss factor of
5 5 5 0.8. Indirect portions are not
4 4 4 taken into consideration.
Eh = 0.5 lx
3 3 3
2 Eh = 0.5 lx 2 1 lx 2 Eh = 0.5 lx
1 lx 1 lx
1 1 1
m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5
429
Emergency components
for diffuser luminaires
1)
For T8 lamps.
2)
For T5 lamps.
3)
Not for TC 11 W or TC 18 W.
4)
Not for TR lamps.
Isolux curve diagram5 Isolux curve diagram6 Isolux curve diagram7 Isolux curve diagram8 Explanation of Isolux
curve diagrams
Tubular lamp 25 W, Tubular lamp 25 W, Tubular lamp 25 W, Tubular lamp 25 W, The horizontal illumanances
165 lm 165 lm 165 lm 165 lm
refer to a level on the floor
Light point height Light point height Light point height Light point height and a light loss factor of
2.5 m 2.5 m 2.5 m 2.5 m 0.8. Indirect portions are not
3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m taken into consideration.
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx
2 2 Eh = 0.5 lx 2 1 lx 2
1 lx Eh = 0.5 lx
1 1 1 1 1 lx
1 lx
m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5
430
LIGHTGATE
Intelligent lighting management
System solution for manual light System solution for daylight- System solution for daylight-
control dependent light regulation and dependent light regulation and
LIGHTGATE 1 is available as a version manual dimming functions manual light level control
without sensor unit, exclusively for bright- LIGHTGATE 2 offers automatic light LIGHTGATE 3 offers the same regulation
ness control by means of customary regulation with optional switch-off function as LIGHTGATE 2, however,
push-buttons for dimming, activating function in case of sufficient daylight for three set value levels, to be chosen
up to two light levels and switching the and optional reignition function in case individually.
lighting installation on and of. the lighting falls short of the set illumi-
nance. Instead of allowing continuous dimming
In combination with sensor, LIGHTGATE 1 in manual mode, LIGHTGATE 3 offers
also allows to control dimmable lighting The manual, daylight-independent the possibility to activate, by means
installations by means of radio remote brightness control can be realised by of customary push-buttons or radio
control (accessories). A presence de- means of customary push-buttons or remote control (accessories), three The brochure LIGHTGATE
tection (which can be switched off) is by means of a radio remote control daylight-independent light levels, to be Intelligent Light Management
also integrated. (accessories). The system automatically chosen individually. The return to regu- offers more detailed informa-
turns from manual mode to regulation lation mode is effected automatically. tion as to function and planning,
mode after one hour. available upon request.
431
LIGHTGATE Three systems for
intelligent lighting management
Wiring scheme
LIGHTGATE has been con-
ceived for use in lighting Controller Data line
Mains voltage supply 4-conductor, RJ11 connectors
installations equipped with
230 V/50 Hz at both ends. Included in mounting
dimmable electronic control accessories 0RM and 0SM.
gear.
The functions:
manual light control,
automatic daylight-
dependent control,
presence-dependent
switching of the lighting
installation.
Switching output L
The LIGHTGATE controller Mains Switched phase of connected
transforms the pilot signals switch luminaires. Switching capacity
from the connected control max. 1000 VA.
keys and sensors into Control output +/ Push-button entries 1...5
switching and dimming 1-10 V interface to control for the connection of up to
signals for the lighting instal- dimmable HF gear (ED). Current five standard push-buttons.
lations. Each push button is carrying capacity max. 50 mA, Line length max. 50 m.
connected according to the for mains-voltage-stable line. Protective low voltage (SELV).
selected function.
432
Installation example: Installation example:
Individual suspended luminaires with Continuous-line surface-
LG 21/RPL+0LM, sensor integrated mounted luminaires with
in master luminaire LG 21/RPL, sensor remote from the luminaire
Sensor unit
Sensor
5 6 5 5
6 6
Dimmable HF gear (ED) Controller Sensor Dimmable HF gear (ED) Controller Sensor
433
Lighting controller LR 803
434
Technical information
d label
All luminaires documented in
this catalogue are marked
with the d label which guar-
antees that during abnormal
operation (constant preheat-
ing of the lamp electrodes)
a temperature of 130C at
the fixing area or in case
of defect ballasts (shorted
coil) a temperature of 180C
at the fixing area is not
exceeded.
o label
Operating conditions Special operating 6 label 4 label dd label
All TRILUX interior luminaires conditions All luminaires documented in All luminaires documented in The design of D or FF marked
are supplied ready for con- In case of deviating operating this catalogue in inductive this catalogue are tested luminaires is such that the
nection for a mains voltage of conditions, please contact or parallel-compensated ver- according to EN 55015 and temperature limits must not
230 V + 6 % /-10 % (for low- your local TRILUX support sions as well as luminaires carry the EMV label for radio be exceeded on either the
loss ballasts) or 230 V 10 % centre. Especially in the case equipped with electronic interference suppression horizontal or vertical sur-
(for electronic control gear) of other voltage networks or control gear are marked with from the VDE test board. faces of the luminaire. In
with a nominal frequency of instability in supply, we can the VDE or the ENEC-VDE addition, they prevent the
50 Hz. They are intended if offer a variety of solutions. label. Multi-lamp luminaires equipped lamps against mechanical
not indicated differently for with inductive ballasts are damage and are always
ceiling mounting (in case of This also applies in case of Ball impact resistance of subject to radio interference equipped with electronic
surface-mounted luminaires less favourable operating sports hall luminaires is suppression for single-phase control gear due to the higher
with total installation to even conditions such as special tested and these luminaires connection. When dividing thermal safety requirements.
fixing surfaces). chemical or physical influ- are correspondingly marked the lamp circuits for series D or FF labelled TRILUX lumi-
ences, e.g. humidity, salt with the e symbol. switching, an additional radio naires are predestined for
The luminaires are if not mist, alkaline solutions, acids, interference suppression use in areas exposed to fire
indicated differently planned softeners, gases, maritime TRILUX luminaires are tested capacitor must be installed on hazards caused by dust and
for the exclusive use in inte- or tropical climates, UV by the VDE test board as site for each further circuit. fibrous substance.
riors with rated ambient tem- radiation, constant or short neutral institute according to Radio interference suppres-
peratures of + 25C. vibrations, cleaning methods, EN 60598 (VDE 0711) and sion capacitors are to be
etc. carry the VDE or ENEC label. connected between conduc-
Appropriate mounting in In addition, the production is tor and neutral conductor.
accordance with the mount- supervised by VDE inspectors
ing instructions is required in who take samples at random
order to observe the assured for further examination.
characteristics.
435
Multi-lamp electronic control gear
Added value in T5 systems
436
Standard warm-start electronic control gear
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Electronic control gear Electronic control gear rep- 1 Quality 4 Emergency lighting 7 ENEC label
In addition to the series resent modern operating Electronic control gear in Suitable for operation to direct The ENEC label documents
5261, 504/505 and electronics for fluorescent TRILUX luminaires are high- voltage of 220 V in emergency tested safety and methods
3331 which are developed lamps. The practice-oriented quality products of a renowned lighting installations. of working according to
for the exclusive use of elec- advantages electronic con- manufacturer. Developed EN 61347/60929.
tronic control gear in Multi- trol gear units have to offer, and produced according to 5 High power factor
Lamp technology, following create decisive requirements international quality assurance High power factor 0.95, 8 EMC label
series are equipped as stand- as to saving energy, environ- requirements in compliance therefore no additional steps The EMC label (Electro
ard with warm-start elec- mental compatibility, comfort with ISO 9001. for wattless compensation Magnetic Compatibility)
tronic control gear (without and safety: required. confirms the conformity
Multi-Lamp function): Minimal stray power 2 Input voltage with the standards for elec-
T200 according to CELMA Constant luminous flux output 6 Lamp ignition, also in tromagnetic compatibility
DiVisio level A2 within the mains voltage case of low temperatures EN 55015,
DIALOG Little stroboscopic effect, bracket of 230 V - 10 % up to Electronic control gear guar- EN 61000 part 3-2,
CENERA no lamp flickering 240 V + 10 %. antee safe lamp ignition and EN 61547.
362 Flicker-free warm lamp lamp operation according
368, 369 start 3 Mains frequency to the standards for up to
39 High performance factor Suitable for operation in ser- - 20C. Please consult your
compensation capacitors vice band of the mains VAC local TRILUX support centre
Besides, most TRILUX lumi- are therefore not required of 50 to 60 Hz or for direct for further details.
naires are optionally also Safety cut-off in case of voltage.
available with these electronic defect lamp
control gear units. High thermal safety
Unlimited use according
TRILUX luminaires with elec- to EU regulation
tronic control gear are indicat- 2000/55/EG Max. number of electronic control gear per line safety switch
ed with the reference suffix
E at the end of their refer- Digital switching Safety Number of electronic control gear units
ence, e.g. 2360/418 RPV E, technology cutout
luminaires with dimmable Electronic control gear in
electronic control gear with TRILUX luminaires is usually T8, TC, TC-L, TC-DEL, TC-TEL, TC-F T5 T5 -
1 - 10 V interface with the operated with digital switch- MLS
characteristic
437
Low-loss ballasts
Max. number of lamps per line safety switch with conventional or low-loss ballasts
TC-F 24W 22W <13,5W <25W <27W <30W <32W <34W >34W
36W 32W < 19W <36W <38W <41W <43W <45W >45W
* Committee Of European Luminaires Manufacturers
EVG: Electronic control gear
VVG: Low-loss ballast
438 KVG: Conventional ballast
Starters
Blind current compensation Switching type Series capacitors in case of inductive ballasts
Blind current of luminaires for parallel compensated for fluorescent lamps 230 V/50 Hz*)
the limitation of the current Most TRILUX luminaires (Temperature range -25C up to + 85C)
load of conductors, switches equipped with low-loss bal-
and safety arrangements lasts with a lamp wattage Lamp Series capacitor
should be compensated if exceeding 18 W are available Type Wattage Capacity Nominal volt.
possible. parallel compensated, (LBS)
Blind current compensation offering following advantages Tubular fluorescent lamps
can be realised by means of compared with series capa- LL 18 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
series or parallel capacitors citors: 2x18 W1) 3.4 F 2% 450 V
as a matter of principle. Par- Energy saving by means of 3x18 W2) 3.4 F 2% 450 V
allel compensation is recom- reduced system current 36 W 3.4 F 2% 450 V
58 W 5.3 F 2% 450 V
mended considering energy No reduced lamp start-up
consumption, lamp service times and lamp service life Compact fluorescent lamps
life and starting behaviour. compared with inductive TC-L 18 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
24 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
Luminaires in switching type operation 36 W 3.4 F 2% 450 V
parallel compensated con- Increased service life of
TC-D 26 W 2.5 F 2% 480 V
tain a pre-equipped PCB-free luminaire components
parallel capacitor. Parallel-compensated lumi- TC-T 26 W 2.5 F 2% 480 V
naires must be characterised TC-F 18 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
by the reference suffix komp. 24 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
36 W 3.4 F 2% 450 V
Example:
5991 RPR/58 komp. 1)
2x18 W in tandem switching to ballast 36 W
2)
3x18 W in a tandem switching to ballast 36 W + a single switching to ballast 18 W
439
Photometric planning
Data table no. 0012 General lighting data rendering), the data table respective corresponding 2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
tables indications are based on the multiplication factor from the g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
1 Number of luminaires Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
En 300 lx 500 lx The purpose of the photom- respective higher values. basic data. Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m etric planning by means of the h = Luminaire height above working plane
20 2.9 3.2 4.8 5.4 Example 1
30 4.0 4.4 6.7 7.3 general lighting data tables All further marginal condi- The uniformity of the illumi-
Luminaire ..........................1360/136RWV
Area
40 5.1 5.5 8.5 9.2 is to determine the number tions which have to be con- nance distribution on the
50 6.2 6.7 10 11 Data table number...........................0012
A
60 7.2 7.8 12 13
of luminaires required for a sidered for calculation of the working plane depends on
in m2 Area A............................................90 m2
80 9.4 9.9 16 17 particular area and to check table Number of luminaires Room height H...............................2.5 m
the luminaire spacing and
100 12 12 20 20
150 17 17 28 29
if the given uniformity has are documented in the calcu- Nominal illuminance En ....................500 lx
the luminaire height h above
200 22 23 37 38 been observed. General lation parameter section. Luminous flux per lamp (p. 444) ...3350 lm
the working plane e. The
Calculation parameters lighting data tables are there- Following parameters can be Number of basic luminaires ..................18 maximum admissible longitu-
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 fore divided into four sub- found in the table: Multiplication factor M dinal and transverse spac-
Light loss factor v 0.8
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m tables. Reflectance values for ceil- for luminaire 1360/136RWV .............1.51 ings (from luminaire centre
Suspension length lp 0.00 m ing/walls/floor, Number of luminaires ......18 x 1.51 = 27.2 to luminaire centre) for a uni-
Data table no. 0012 Light loss factor consider- Selected number of luminaires .............28 formity Emin/E of minimum
2 Max. luminaire
spacings for
(adjusted to the structural factors)
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 ing the ageing and pollution 1: 1.5 are indicated in sub-
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx influences, table 2 I Max. luminaire
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h If the luminous flux of the
h = Luminaire height above working plane
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m Height of the working plane spacings as multiple values
used lamps should deviate
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric The table 1I Number of above the floor and eventu- of the height of the photom-
from the maximum values,
for no. of luminaires characteristics luminaires indicates the ally the suspension length etric point h. The spacings
Reference M LB L the following should also be
required number of lumi- for suspended luminaires. between the luminaires are
direct indirect
observed: the required num-
DLOR ULOR
naires: measured centre-to-centre.
1360/136 RWV 1.51 0.66 0.66 0.00 ber of luminaires are at a
1360/158 RWV 1.00 0.64 0.64 0.00 For the most frequent nom- Please note that the lumen
reverse ratio to the luminous
1361/236 RWV 0.78 0.63 0.63 0.00 inal illuminances (usually output of fluorescent lamps Example 3
1361/258 RWV 0.53 0.60 0.60 0.00 flux.
1361/318 RWV 1.20 0.68 0.68 0.00 300 lx and 500 lx). can differ depending on the Luminaire ...........................1360/136RWV
1361/418 RWV 0.97 0.63 0.63 0.00 For the most frequent control gear, and therefore Room height H...............................2.50 m
2360/236 RWV 0.78 0.63 0.63 0.00 Example 2
2360/258 RWV 0.53 0.60 0.60 0.00 room heights (in case of marginal adjustment of the Height of the working plane e..........0.85 m
Original number of luminaires
2360/318 RWV 1.20 0.68 0.68 0.00 luminaires for offices e.g. calculation can be neces- Suspension length lp ......................0.00 m
2360/418 RWV 0.97 0.63 0.63 0.00 according to the example..................27.2
2.5 m and 3.0 m). sary. Luminaire height above working plane h......
Luminous flux in the table
For room surface areas 2.50 m - 0.85 m - 0.00 m = 1.65 m
Number of luminaires ...............2350 lm
from 20 m2 to 200 m2. 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric Max. transverse
for no. of luminaires characteristics Deviating luminous flux of
spacing.........1.9 h = 1.9 x 1.65 m = 3.14 m
Reference M LB L the intended lamp type ................3250 lm
Max. longitudinal
The number of luminaires direct indirect
Number of luminaires for
DLOR ULOR
spacing .........1.5 h = 1.5 x 1.65 m = 2.48 m
determined must be rounded 1360/136 RWV 1.51 0.66 0.66 0.00 deviating luminous flux
to meet installation require- The values given in the table 27.2 x 3350/2350 = 38.8
ments. The number refers to Number of luminaires refer Selected number of luminaires .............40
the respective luminous flux- directly to the respective
es with the corresponding luminaire with the factor For each luminaire, together
lamps in the lamp table (see 1.00 (basic luminaire) in the with the overall working effi-
page 444-447). In case of subtable 3 I Multiplication ciency, the values of lumi-
different luminous fluxes for factor M for no. of lumi- nous flux in the upper and
lamp types of the same naires. The number of lumi- lower hemisphere are quoted
manufacturer and with the naires for luminaires with in subtable 4 I Photometric
same performance (e.g. vari- deviating equipment can be characteristics.
ants with different colour determined by using the
440
Installation data tables Data table no. 2035 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/80 E
Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
The photometric characteris-
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0
luminaire-specific light data. Lamps W 2 x 80 (T5) 500
Installation description dering factor has an average with the relevant standards Isolux curve diagram 2 installed at a distance of
The installation description value of 0.95 and a minimum and regulations. Apart from (right) 3.50 m from each other, the
refers to all luminaires used value of 0.91. the photometric results The Isolux curve diagram on lowest value in the middle
in the specific application, given in the installation the right characterises the between the two luminaires
the installation geometry and Isolux curve diagram 1 description, the Isolux curve luminaire-specific photom- (on a direct perpendicular
its marginal conditions, the (left) diagram clearly illustrates etrics in the empty room. from luminaire centre to
light loss factor and the The example installation the illuminance distribution Mutual influences of lumi- luminaire centre, at a dis-
achieved photometric values. described in the data table on the working or evaluation naires can be considered by tance of 1.75 m from each
In the above example 576 lx is a recommendation for a plane. This example shows (linear) superimposition of of both luminaires) neverthe-
are achieved on the desk and typical and suitable luminaire an illuminance of 500 lx or the corresponding Isolux less still achieves 400 lx.
345 lx in the whole room; application that, among more. curves. If for instance similar
the important contrast ren- other things, fully complies task area luminaires are
surface .3500 cd/(2 m x 2 m) = 875 lx 3 Lamp data
I/cd
the luminous intensity and r -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
Point illuminance E on Lamp type
1 Luminous intensity distribution the distance of the spotlight surface inclined by 30 Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V 2 Cone diagram, beam angle 33
4 000 to the illuminated point. (effective) ...875 lx x cos 30 = 758 lx with semi-specular bulb
3 500 Socket /m 0.30
3 000
If this point is located on a E 27 0.60
9 200
2 300
2 500 surface whose perpendicular 2 Cone diagram, beam angle 33 Apart from the LBS and 0.90
1 000
1.20
The diagram 1I Luminous (standard surface) includes /m 0.30
9 200 ILCOS classification for the 1.50
575
0.60 375
intensity distribution repres- an angle bigger than 0 with 0.90
2 300 clear marking of the usable 1.80
250
1 000
ents an axial section through the connection line to the 1.20
575
lamps, the table 3 I Lamp
a rotationally symmetrical spotlight, the determined The beam angle indicated in data also features the multi-
Illuminance
luminous intensity distribu- illuminance has to be multi- the heading is the aperture plication factors for deviat-
Em / lx
tion body. It is important to plied with the cosine of this (twice the corresponding ing equipments in order to
check the luminous intensity angle. beam angle) for which the determine the valid values 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m
luminous intensity reaches for the selected lamp types. 3 Lamp data
half the maximum luminous The factors are to be applied Lamp type
(circle) = 1.2 m
Virtual surface
angle 33
Angle of
incidence
Standard surface
of real surface
Real surface
Beam
(ellipse)
intensity. In this example to all basic data. Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V
with semi-specular bulb
the beam angle is 33. Fur- Socket
Example 3
thermore the average illumi- E 27
Equipment ........................................100 W Lamp designation Luminous Multipl.
nances are documented on a flux / lm factor
LBS ................................QT32 100W/mE27
vertically illuminated surface LBS QT32 150W/m E27
2400 1.00
Luminous flux ................................1430 lm ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-150-320-E27
which is cut out of the illumi- Multiplication factor .............................0.60 LBS QT32 100W/m E27
1430 0.60
nated surface by a cone with Point illuminance on the
ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-100-320-E27
LBS QT32 75W/m E27
the beam angle as aperture. surface inclined by 30 ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-75-320-E27
1050 0.44
This value and the corre- (example 1) ...............758 lx x 0.60 = 455 lx LBS QT32 60W/m E27
780 0.33
ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-60-320-E27
sponding surface diameter is Average illuminance on the
indicated for several distance inclined surface within
the beam angle
r = 2.0
2,0 m parameters. (33, example 2)........498 lx x 0.60 = 299 lx
Point Attention:
illumi- 30 All data in the spotlight data tables are as-
nance E new values (v = 1), a light loss factor is, if
required, to apply in addition to all calcula-
tion results.
30
441
Computer-assisted lighting planning
Computer-assisted plannings on PC For these purposes several computer programs with different characteristics and
basis allow the planner to make object- specifications can be obtained.
specific calculations on site with high
accuracy. Thus important characteristic TX-WIN Generic software
values of a lighting installation can be TX-WIN is the easy-to-operate computer Beyond that, TRILUX also offers
determined, e.g. point illuminances, program TRILUX developed for rapid photometric data in different formats
average illuminances and illuminance planning. for market-common lighting calculation
uniformities. Furthermore luminance software.
distributions on surfaces in the room DIALux
can be calculated and visualised. DIALux in version 2.5 is the new light Special application programs
planning program developed by the Useful tools which facilitate the daily
German Institute for Applied Photom- planning work are also available for
etrics (DIAL). sub-scenes of the lighting planning.
442
CALIS
DELTA and E-LINE substitute references
Light simulation
CALIS (Computer Aided
Light Simulation) is a special
TRILUX internal program
offering photo-realistic possi-
bilities. This exceptional
planning software allows to
visualise the illuminated room
and thus shows the effect of
the illumination even during
the design stages. Please
contact your local TRILUX
support centre for more
details.
443
Lamp characteristics & data
for TRILUX interior luminaires
OSRAM PHILIPS
Lamp diameter
Lamp length
Lamp rating
CCT class
Ra group
tional/ tronic tional/ tronic
Sales name low-loss control Sales name low-loss control
ballast gear ballast gear
* * * *
W mm mm lm lm lm lm
444
OSRAM PHILIPS Conventional/ Electronic
low-loss ballast control gear
Lamp length
Lamp rating
Lamp type
CCT class
Ra group
Sales name Sales name Socket * Socket *
W mm lm lm
445
Lamp characteristics & data
for TRILUX interior luminaires
CCT class
Ra group
Sales name Sales name Socket * Socket *
W mm lm lm
446
OSRAM PHILIPS Socket
Lamp diameter
Lamp length
Lamp rating
Lamp type
CCT class
Ra group
Sales name Sales name
W mm mm lm lm
447
Reference number index
Reference Page Reference Page Reference Page Reference Page Reference Page
TRILUX TRILUX TRILUX TRILUX TRILUX
448
Europe Middle East Asia-Pacific
Subsidiaries and exclusive distributors: Exclusive distributors: Exclusive distributors: